diff options
Diffstat (limited to '20866.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 20866.txt | 11016 |
1 files changed, 11016 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/20866.txt b/20866.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a24cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/20866.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11016 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Infantry Drill Regulations, United States +Army, 1911, by United States War Department + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Infantry Drill Regulations, United States Army, 1911 + Corrected to April 15, 1917 (Changes Nos. 1 to 19) + + +Author: United States War Department + + + +Release Date: March 20, 2007 [eBook #20866] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED +STATES ARMY, 1911*** + + +E-text prepared by Bethanne M. Simms, Linda Cantoni, and the Project +Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net). +Special thanks to Daniel Emerson Griffith for creating the Lilypond sound +and image files for the bugle calls. + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes sound clips of bugal calls and + the numerous original graphic illustrations. + See 20866-h.htm or 20866-h.zip: + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h/20866-h.htm) + or + (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/1/20866/20866-h.zip) + + +Transcriber's note: + + Nearly all of the italicized text in the original book is + also in bold typeface. For ease of reading, bold typeface + is not indicated in this e-book. Both bold and italics are + indicated by _underscores_. + + + + + +Infantry Drill Regulations + +UNITED STATES ARMY + +1911 + +CORRECTED TO APRIL 15, 1917 +(Changes Nos. 1 to 19) + + +MILITARY PUBLISHING CO. +42 BROADWAY +NEW YORK + + +WAR DEPARTMENT +Document No. 394 +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF + + + + +WAR DEPARTMENT, +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, +_Washington, August 19, 1911._ + +The following System of Drill Regulations for Infantry, prepared by a +board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col. John F. Morrison, +Infantry; Capt. Merch B. Stewart, Eighth Infantry; and Capt. Alfred W. +Bjornstad, Twenty-eighth Infantry, is approved and is published for +the information and government of the Regular Army and the Organized +Militia of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity +throughout the Army, all infantry drill formations not embraced in +this system are prohibited, and those herein prescribed will be +strictly observed. + +By order of the Secretary of War: + +LEONARD WOOD, +_Major General, Chief of Staff._ + + + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS. + + +PART I--_Drill._ Paragraph. + + 1. Introduction 1-30 + 2. Orders, commands and signals 31-47 + 3. School of the soldier 48-100 + 4. School of the squad 101-158 + 5. School of the company 159-257 + (_a_) Close order 167-198 + (_b_) Extended order 199-231 + (_c_) Fire 232-257 + 6. The battalion 258-326 + (_a_) Close order 263-289 + (_b_) Combat principles 290-326 + 7. The regiment 327-346 + (_a_) Close order 333-341 + (_b_) Combat principles 342-346 + 8. The brigade 347-349 + +PART II--_Combat._ + + 1. Introduction 350-357 + 2. Leadership 358-388 + (_a_) General considerations 358-370 + (_b_) Teamwork 371-377 + (_c_) Orders 378-383 + (_d_) Communication 384-388 + 3. Combat reconnaissance 389-399 + 4. Fire superiority 400-424 + (_a_) Purpose and nature 400-401 + (_b_) Fire direction and control 402-424 + 5. Deployment 425-441 + 6. Attack 442-488 + (_a_) Deployment for attack 449-452 + (_b_) Advancing the attack 453-457 + (_c_) The fire attack 458-463 + (_d_) The charge 464-475 + (_e_) Pursuit 476-480 + (_f_) Attack of fortifications 481-484 + (_g_) Holding attack 485-488 + 7. Defense 489-519 + (_a_) Positions and intrenchments 489-494 + (_b_) Deployment for defense 495-510 + (_c_) Counterattack 511-516 + (_d_) Delaying action 517-519 + 8. Meeting engagements 520-530 + 9. Withdrawal from action 531-535 +10. Miscellaneous 537-622 + (_a_) Machine guns 537-546 + (_b_) Ammunition supply 547-553 + (_c_) Mounted scouts 554-557 + (_d_) Night operations 558-568 + (_e_) Infantry against Cavalry 569-574 + (_f_) Infantry against Artillery 575-578 + (_g_) Artillery supports 579-583 + (_h_) Intrenchments 584-595 + (_i_) Minor warfare 596-603 + (_j_) Patrols 604-622 + +PART III--_Marches and camps._ + + 1. Marches 623-660 + (_a_) Training and discipline 623-635 + (_b_) Protection of the march 636-660 + 2. Camps 661-707 + (_a_) Sanitation 661-677 + (_b_) Protection of camp or bivouac 678-707 + +PART IV--_Ceremonies and inspections._ + + 1. Ceremonies 708-765 + (_a_) Reviews 711-731 + (_b_) Parades 732-735 + (_c_) Escorts 736-744 + 2. Inspections 745-754 + 3. Muster 755-757 + 4. Honors and salutes 758-765 + +PART V.--_Manuals._ + + 1. The color 766-778 + 2. The band 779-781 + 3. Manual of the saber 782-791 + 4. Manual of tent pitching 792-803 + 5. Manual of the bugle 804-807 + (_a_) Bugle calls. + (_b_) Bugle signals. + + + + +INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. + +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1911. + + + + +DEFINITIONS. + + +_Alignment:_ A straight line upon which several elements are formed, +or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon a +straight line. + +_Base:_ The element on which a movement is regulated. + +_Battle sight:_ The position of the rear sight when the leaf is laid +down. + +_Center:_ The middle point or element of a command. + +_Column:_ A formation in which the elements are placed one behind +another. + +_Deploy:_ To extend the front. In general to change from column to +line, or from close order to extended order. + +_Depth:_ The space from head to rear of any formation, including the +leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 +inches. + +_Distance:_ Space between elements in the direction of depth. Distance +is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast of the man +in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both line and +column. + +_Element:_ A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming +part of a still larger body. + +_File:_ Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the +rear rank. The front-rank man is the _file leader_. A file which has +no rear-rank man is a _blank file_. The term _file_ applies also to a +single man in a single-rank formation. + +_File closers:_ Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a +company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men +posted in the line of file closers. + +_Flank:_ The right or left of a command in line or in column; also the +element on the right or left of the line. + +_Formation:_ Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing of +all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle. + +_Front:_ The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in line +or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches. Front +also denotes the direction of the enemy. + +_Guide:_ An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom the +command or elements thereof regulates its march. + +_Head:_ The leading element of a column. + +_Interval:_ Space between elements of the same line. The interval +between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow. +Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of +the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of +the right man or guide of the group on the left. + +_Left:_ The left extremity or element of a body of troops. + +_Line:_ A formation in which the different elements are abreast of +each other. + +_Order, close:_ The formation in which the units, in double rank, are +arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances. + +_Order, extended:_ The formation in which the units are separated by +intervals greater than in close order. + +_Pace:_ Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time. + +_Point of rest:_ The point at which a formation begins. Specifically, +the point toward which units are aligned in successive movements. + +_Rank:_ A line of men placed side by side. + +_Right:_ The right extremity or element of a body of troops. + + + + +PART I.--DRILL. + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +1. Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training; +success may be looked for only when the training is intelligent and +thorough. + +2. Commanding officers are accountable for the proper training of +their respective organizations within the limits prescribed by +regulations and orders. + +The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency. +The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its +effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training +of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of +the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite teamwork may +be developed. + +3. Simple movements and elastic formations are essential to correct +training for battle. + +4. The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the +principles for training and for increasing the probability of success +in battle. + +In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought. +Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to grasp +the spirit. + +5. The principles of combat are considered in Part II of these +regulations. They are treated in the various schools included in Part +I only to the extent necessary to indicate the functions of the +various commanders and the division of responsibility between them. +The amplification necessary to a proper understanding of their +application is to be sought in Part II. + +6. The following important distinctions must be observed: + +(_a_) Drills executed at _attention_ and the ceremonies are +_disciplinary exercises_ designed to teach precise and soldierly +movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience +which is essential to proper military control. To this end, smartness +and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such +drills should be frequent, but short. + +(_b_) The purpose of _extended order drill_ is to teach the +_mechanism_ of deployment, of the firings, and, in general, of the +employment of troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of +disciplinary exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact in +order to habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended +order drill is executed _at ease_. The company is the largest unit +which executes extended order drill. + +(_c_) _Field exercises_ are for instruction in the duties incident to +campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should +conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and +principles involved. + +(_d_) The _combat exercise, a form of field exercise_ of the company, +battalion, and larger units, consists of the _application of tactical +principles_ to assumed situations, employing in the execution the +appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order. + +Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle +conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with +such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be +consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and +noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of +the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires. + +The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough +training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary. + +The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order +to restore smartness and control. + +7. In field exercises the enemy is said to be _imaginary_ when his +position and force are merely assumed; _outlined_ when his position +and force are indicated by a few men; _represented_ when a body of +troop acts as such. + + +_General Rules for Drills and Formations._ + +8. When the _preparatory_ command consists of more than one part, its +elements are arranged as follows: + +(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or +elements of an organization: (_a_) Description of the movement; (_b_) +how executed, or on what element executed. + +(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of +an organization: (_a_) The designation of the subdivisions; (_b_) the +movement to be executed. + +9. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as +toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word "left" +for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the +corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given +for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute +word of the command is placed within parentheses. + +10. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when +marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the command for +movements involving marching need not be prefaced by _forward_, as 1. +_Column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +11. Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in double +time. + +If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command _double time_ +precedes the command of execution. + +12. In successive movements executed in double time the leading or +base unit marches in _quick time_ when not otherwise prescribed; the +other units march in _double time_ to their places in the formation +ordered and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If +marching in double time, the command _double time_ is omitted. The +leading or base unit marches in _quick time_; the other units continue +at double time to their places in the formation ordered and then +conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. + +13. To hasten the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the +command: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_, is given. The leading or base +unit continues to march in quick time, or remains at halt if already +halted; the other units complete the execution of the movement in +double time and then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. + +14. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the +correction of errors, the command: 1. _In place_, 2. _HALT_, is given. +All halt and stand fast, without changing the position of the pieces. +To resume the movement the command: 1. _Resume_, 2. _MARCH_, is given. + +15. To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin +anew a movement improperly begun, the command, _AS YOU WERE_, is +given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is +resumed. + +16. Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or subdivision +of a company in line is _right_; of a battalion in line or line of +subdivisions or of a deployed line, _center_; of a rank in column of +squads, toward the side of the guide of the company. + +To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the +guide: _Guide (right, left_, or _center)_. + +In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of +rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced. + +The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a +movement, follows the command of execution for that movement. +Exception: 1. _As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. +_MARCH_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +17. _The turn on the fixed pivot_ by subdivisions is used in all +formations from line into column and the reverse. + +_The turn on the moving pivot_ is used by subdivisions of a column in +executing changes of direction. + +18. Partial changes of direction may be executed: + +By interpolating in the preparatory command the word _half_, as +_Column half right (left)_, or _Right (left) half turn_. A change of +direction of 45 deg. is executed. + +By the command: _INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT)_. The guide, or guiding +element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the +command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction. + +19. The designations _line of platoons_, _line of companies_, _line of +battalions_, etc., refer to the formations in which the platoons, +companies, battalions, etc., each in column of squads, are in line. + +20. Full distance in column of subdivisions is such that in forming +line to the right or left the subdivisions will have their proper +intervals. + +In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is +charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the +trace, step, and distance. + +21. In close order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of +troops are habitually formed in double rank. + +To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in and in +alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip, +fingers pointing downward. In the first case the hand is dropped by +the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second +case, at the command _front_. + +22. The posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, special units +(such as band or machine-gun company), etc., in the various formations +of the company, battalion, or regiment, are shown in plates. + +In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of +post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most +convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution +for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have +prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their +new posts when such duties are completed. + +As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever +their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to +rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks. + +23. Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They +take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as +nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements +maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of +the command on which they were originally posted. + +24. General, field, and staff officers are habitually mounted. The +staff of an officer forms in single rank 3 paces in rear of him, the +right of the rank extending 1 pace to the right of a point directly in +rear of him. Members of the staff are arranged in order from right to +left as follows: General staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff +officers, arranged in each classification in order of rank, the senior +on the right. The flag of the general officer and the orderlies are 3 +paces in rear of the staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to +reduce the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes _twos +right_ or _fours right_, as explained in the Cavalry Drill +Regulations, and follows the commander. + +When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber +with their chief. + +25. In making the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the +left. + +When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and +orderlies do not change position. + +26. When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of +doors, all officers will salute. + +Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the +salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or +formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for +example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer +making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer +to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has +received and understood the report. + +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._) + +27. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller +unit, except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are +consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no +officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad +of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers +are on the right or in the leading ranks. + +28. For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff officers as are +dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in order of rank +from right to left. In column of squads they march as file closers. + +29. Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff officers and +orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless otherwise directed. +If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are ordinarily posted +on the right or at the head of the orderlies. + +30. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer +commanding a platoon or company carries his piece as the men do, if he +is so armed, and takes the same post as an officer in like situation. +When the command is formed in line for ceremonies, a noncommissioned +officer commanding a company takes post on the right of the right +guide after the company has been aligned. + + + + +ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS. + + +31. _Commands_ only are employed in drill at attention. Otherwise +either a _command_, _signal_, or _order_ is employed, as best suits +the occasion, or one may be used in conjunction with another. + +32. Signals should be freely used in instruction, in order that +officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals the +saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. + +33. Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of command, +the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the +signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command and the command +of execution; the movement commences as soon as the signal is +understood, unless otherwise prescribed. + +34. Except in movements executed at _attention_, commanders or leaders +of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or signals whenever such +repetition is deemed necessary to insure prompt and correct execution. + +Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders, +guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles. + +The major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the +captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the +platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._) + +35. Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a +substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice +inadequate. + +Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to +facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular +situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that +simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal. + + +_Orders._ + +36. In these regulations an _order_ embraces instructions or +directions given orally or in writing in terms suited to the +particular occasion and not prescribed herein. + +_Orders_ are employed only when the _commands_ prescribed herein do +not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander. + +Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive. + + +_Commands._ + +37. In these regulations a _command_ is the will of the commander +expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. + +38. There are two kinds of commands: + +The _preparatory_ command, such as _forward_, indicates the movement +that is to be executed. + +The command of _execution_, such as _MARCH_, _HALT_, or _ARMS_, causes +the execution. + +_Preparatory_ commands are distinguished by _italics_, those of +_execution_ by _CAPITALS_. + +Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands +prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit +concerned. + +The _preparatory_ command should be given at such an interval of time +before the command of _execution_ as to admit of being properly +understood: the command of _execution_ should be given at the instant +the movement is to commence. + +The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness +proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended. + +Each _preparatory_ command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising +inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of +_execution_ may be more energetic. + +The command of _execution_ is firm in tone and brief. + +39. Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion repeat such +commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their units, +facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the largest unit +that executes a movement at the command of execution of its commander. + +40. When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward +them. + +Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity +in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times. + + +_Bugle Signals._ + +41. The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these +regulations. + +The following bugle signals may be used off the battle field, when not +likely to convey information to the enemy: + +_Attention:_ Troops are brought to attention. + +_Attention to orders:_ Troops fix their attention. + +_Forward, march:_ Used also to execute quick time from double time. + +_Double time, march._ + +_To the rear, march:_ In close order, execute _squads right about_. + +_Halt._ + +_Assemble, march._ + +The following bugle signals may be used on the battle field: + +_Fix bayonets._ + +_Charge._ + +_Assemble, march._ + +These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line; +hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for +example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of +the battle field. Exception: _Fix bayonet_. (See par. 318.) + +The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the +battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice +firing. + +_Commence firing:_ Officers charged with fire direction and control +open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the +signal is equivalent to _fire at will_. + +_Cease firing:_ All parts of the line execute _cease firing_ at once. + +These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except +when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment. + + +_Whistle Signals._ + +42. _Attention to orders._ A _short blast_ of the whistle. This signal +is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention +of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving +commands, orders, or signals. + +When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and +fixes his attention at a _short blast_ of his platoon leader's +whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are +repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's +attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon +leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad +he resumes firing at once. + +_Suspend firing._ A _long blast_ of the whistle. + +All other whistle signals are prohibited. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 15._) + + +_Arm Signals._ + +43. The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either +arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line +"repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding. + +_Forward, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold +the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. + +This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time. + +_Halt._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and +hold the arm vertically. + +_Double time, march._ Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust +the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times. + +_Squads right, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry +it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times +between the vertical and horizontal positions. + +_Squads left, march._ Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry +it downward to the side and swing it several times between the +downward and horizontal positions. + +_Squads right about, march_ (if in close order) or, _To the rear, +march_ (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the +head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several +times between the vertical and downward positions. + +_Change direction_ or _Column right (left), march._ The hand on the +side toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried +across the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then +swing in a horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new +direction. + +_As skirmishers, march._ Raise both arms laterally until horizontal. + +_As skirmishers, guide center, march._ Raise both arms laterally until +horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return +to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +_As skirmishers, guide right (left), march._ Raise both arms laterally +until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in +the horizontal position; swing the other upward until vertical and +return it to the horizontal; repeat several times. + +_Assemble, march._ Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and +describe horizontal circles. + +_Range_, or _Change elevation._ To announce _range_, extend the arm +toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist +closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by +opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number +equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short +horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the +_amount of increase_ or _decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward +to indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease. + +_What range are you using?_ or _What is the range?_ Extend the arms +toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting +on the other hand, fist closed. + +_Are you ready?_ or _I am ready._ Raise the hand, fingers extended and +joined, palm toward the person addressed. + +_Commence firing._ Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm +down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body. + +_Fire faster._ Execute rapidly the signal "Commence firing." + +_Fire slower._ Execute slowly the signal "Commence firing." + +_To swing the cone of fire to the right, or left._ Extend the arm in +full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to +right (left), and point in the direction of the new target. + +_Fix bayonet._ Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix +bayonet" (par. 95). + +_Suspend firing._ Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal +position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front. + +_Cease firing._ Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it +up and down several times in front of the face. + +_Platoon._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; +describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 44.) + +_Squad._ Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing +the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 44.) + +_Rush._ Same as _double time_. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 14._) + +44. The signals _platoon_ and _squad_ are intended primarily for +communication between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal +_platoon_ or _squad_ indicates that the platoon commander is to cause +the signal which follows to be executed by platoon or squad. + + +_Flag Signals._ + +45. The signal flags described below are carried by the company +musicians in the field. + +In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent +battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as +shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within +their respective battalions, in the order given below. + +First battalion: + Company A. Red field, white square. + Company B. Red field, blue square. + Company C. Red field, white diagonals. + Company D. Red field, blue diagonals. + +Second battalion: + Company E. White field, red square. + Company F. White field, blue square. + Company G. White field, red diagonals. + Company H. White field, blue diagonals. + +Third battalion: + Company I. Blue field, red square. + Company K. Blue field, white square. + Company L. Blue field, red diagonals. + Company M. Blue field, white diagonals. + +46. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to +mark the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat, +and to mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when +such use is desirable. + +47. (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve or +commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes) are +prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their concealment +from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal +flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used. + +--------------+--------------------------------+--------------------------- + Letter of |If signaled from the rear to |If signaled from the firing + alphabet. | the firing line. | line to the rear. +--------------+--------------------------------+--------------------------- +AM |Ammunition going forward. |Ammunition required. +CCC |Charge (mandatory at all times).|Am about to charge if no + | | instructions to the + | | contrary. +CF |Cease firing. |Cease firing. +DT |Double time or "rush". |Double time or "rush". +F |Commence firing. |Commence firing. +FB |Fix bayonets. |Fix bayonets. +FL |Artillery fire is causing us |Artillery fire is causing + | losses. | us losses. +G |Move forward. |Preparing to move forward. +HHH |Halt. |Halt. +K |Negative. |Negative. +LT |Left. |Left. +O |What is the (R.N. etc.)? |What is the (R.N. etc.)? +(Ardois | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. +and | | +semaphore | | +only.) | | +_ _ __ __ _ _ | | + |What is the (R.N. etc.)? |What is the (R.N. etc.)? +(All | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. +methods | | +but ardois | | +and | | +semaphore.) | | +P |Affirmative. |Affirmative. +R |Acknowledgment. |Acknowledgment. +RN |Range. |Range. +RT |Right. |Right. +SSS |Support going forward. |Support needed. +SUF |Suspend firing. |Suspend firing. +T |Target. |Target. +--------------+--------------------------------+--------------------------- + +(2) THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE. + +(See illustrations on pages following.) + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 13._) + + +TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE. + +[Illustration] + +[Illustration] + + + + +SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. + + +48. The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing it +himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper +positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of +correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He +avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each +should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees +the desired precision and uniformity. + +49. In order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities +permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as +instruction progresses. Those who lack aptitude and quickness are +separated from the others and placed under experienced drill masters. + + +_INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS._ + +50. For preliminary instruction a number of recruits, usually not +exceeding three or four, are formed as a squad in single rank. + + +_Position of the Soldier, or Attention._ + +51. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation +of the man permits. + +Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 deg. + +Knees straight without stiffness. + +Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on +hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally. + +Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the +trousers. + +Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis +of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front. + +Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the +feet. + + +_The Rests._ + +52. Being at a halt, the commands are: _FALL OUT_; _REST_; _AT EASE_; +and 1. _Parade_, 2. _Rest_. + +At the command _fall out_, the men may leave the ranks, but are +required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former +places, at attention, at the command _fall in_. + +At the command _rest_ each man keeps one foot in place, but is not +required to preserve silence or immobility. + +At the command _at ease_ each man keeps one foot in place and is +required to preserve silence but not immobility. + +53. 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to +the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without +constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left +hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the +right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position. + +54. To resume the attention: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take +the position of the soldier. + + +_Eyes Right or Left._ + +55. 1. _Eyes_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_, 3. _FRONT_. + +At the command _right_, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed +on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same +rank. At the command _front_, turn the head and eyes to the front. + + +_Facings._ + +56. To the flank: 1. _Right (left)_, 2. _FACE_. + +Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning +on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the +left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is +executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner. + +_Right (left) half face_ is executed similarly, facing 45 deg. + +"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and +step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in +marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball +of either foot and mark time. + +57. To the rear: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_. + +Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear +and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the +position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on +the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the +left. + + +_Salute with the Hand._ + +58. 1. _Hand_, 2. _SALUTE_. + +Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb +and fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at +about 45 deg., hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward +the person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the arm smartly by the side. + +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes," paragraphs +758-765. + +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 3, 6, and 18._) + + +_STEPS AND MARCHINGS._ + +59. All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step, +begin with the left foot. + +60. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured +from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per +minute. + +The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence +is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. + +The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by +calling _one, two, three, four_, or _left, right_, the instant the +left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. + +61. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed +in _quick time_ unless the squad be marching in _double time_, or +_double time_ be added to the command; in the latter case _double +time_ is added to the preparatory command. Example: 1. _Squad right, +double time_, 2. _MARCH_ (School of the Squad). + + +_Quick Time._ + +62. Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. _Forward_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +At the command _forward_, shift the weight of the body to the right +leg, left knee straight. + +At the command _march_, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30 +inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without +shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as +above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. + +63. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double +time: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_. + +If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the +right leg. At the command _march_, raise the forearms, fingers closed, +to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run +with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging +motion to the arms. + +If marching in quick time, at the command _march_, given as either +foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step +off in double time. + +64. To resume the quick time: 1. _Quick time_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick +time, dropping the hands by the sides. + + +_To Mark Time._ + +65. Being in march: 1. _Mark time_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and +continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches +and planting it on line with the other. + +Being at a halt, at the command _march_, raise and plant the feet as +described above. + + +_The Half Step._ + +66. 1. _Half step_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. + +67. _Forward_, _half step_, _halt_, and _mark time_ may be executed +one from the other in quick or double time. + +To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. _Forward_, 2. +_MARCH_. + + +_Side Step._ + +68. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Right (left) step_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left +foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time. + +The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time. + +If at order arms, the side step is executed _at trail_ without +command. + + +_Back Step._ + +69. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. _Backward_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. + +The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time. + +If at order arms, the back step is executed _at trail_ without +command. + + +_To Halt._ + +70. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. _Squad_, 2. +_HALT_. + +At the command _halt_, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant +the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the +side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides. + + +_To March by the Flank._ + +71. Being in march: 1. _By the right (left) flank_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching +and step off in the new direction with the right foot. + + +_To March to the Rear._ + +72. Being in march: 1. _To the rear_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls +of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot. + +If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps +in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot. + + +_Change Step._ + +73. Being in march: 1. _Change step_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near +the heel of the left and step off with the left foot. + +The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command +_march_ being given as the left foot strikes the ground. + + +_MANUAL OF ARMS._ + +74. As soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature +(Pl. I), and care of his rifle; when fair progress has been made in +the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms; +instruction without arms and that with arms alternate. + +75. The following rules govern the carrying of the piece: + +First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber +or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or +supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with +the _safety lock_ turned to the "safe." At all other times it is +carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. + +Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately +inspected at the commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_; 3. _Order +(Right shoulder, port)_, 4. _ARMS_. + +A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. + +If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed +and placed in the belt. + +Third. The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are +actually used. + +Fourth. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard, +or for combat. + +Fifth. _Fall in_ is executed with the piece at the order arms. _Fall +out_, _rest_, and _at ease_ are executed as without arms. On resuming +_attention_ the position of order arms is taken. + +Sixth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is +brought to the right shoulder at the command _march_, the three +motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be +executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the +words _at trail_; as, 1. _At trail, forward_, 2. _MARCH_; the trail is +taken at the command _march_. + +When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or +distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece +to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting. + +Seventh. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution +of the order begins when the halt is completed. + +Eighth. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without +arms. + +[Illustration: Plate I. [Transcriber's Note: Plate number omitted in +original.]] + +76. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms: + +First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of +gravity, bayonet unfixed) the thumb clasps the piece; the sling is +included in the grasp of the hand. + +Second. In all positions of the piece "diagonally across the body" the +position of the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms. + +Third. In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the +motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the piece about 3 +inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and +near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended and joined, +forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the +right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order, lower the piece +gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the +side, and take the position of order arms. + +Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or +other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the +manual, is prohibited. + +Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits +are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the +motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they become +accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require them +to count aloud in cadence with the motions. + +Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are, for the +purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail; +in this case the command of _execution_ determines the prompt +execution of the first motion, and the commands, _two_, _three_, +_four_, that of the other motions. + +To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: _By +the numbers_; all movements divided into motions are then executed as +above explained until he cautions: _Without the numbers_; or commands +movements other than those in the manual of arms. + +Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the +manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the +previous position of the piece. + +Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be +carried in any manner directed. + +77. _Position of order arms standing:_ The butt rests evenly on the +ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and +touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand +holding the piece between the thumb and fingers. + +78. Being at order arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_. + +With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the +body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at +the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (_TWO_) +Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. + +79. Being at order arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_. + +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the +body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the +small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up, +sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck +with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting +against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front. + +80. Being at present arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Carry the piece diagonally across the body and take the position of +port arms. + +81. Being at port arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the +body and take the position of present arms. + +82. Being at present or port arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right +with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the +lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last +position in coming to the order. (_TWO_) Complete the order. + +83. Being at order arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_. + +With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the +body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel +between the first two fingers. (_TWO_) Without changing the grasp of +the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and +inclined at an angle of about 45 deg. from the horizontal, trigger guard +in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in +a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip +of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow +down. (_THREE_) Drop the left hand by the side. + +84. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (_TWO_), +(_THREE_) Execute order arms as described from port arms. + +85. Being at port arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Change the right hand to the butt. (_TWO_), (_THREE_) As in right +shoulder arms from order arms. + +86. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (_TWO_) Change +the right hand to the small of the stock. + +87. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Execute port arms. (_THREE_) Execute present arms. + +88. Being at present arms: 1. _Right shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Execute port arms. (_TWO_), (_THREE_), (_FOUR_) Execute right shoulder +arms as from port arms. + +89. Being at port arms: 1. _Left shoulder_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder, +barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same +time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second +fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (_TWO_) Drop the right +hand by the side. + +Being at left shoulder arms: 1. _Port_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (_TWO_) +Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the +left, and take the position of port arms. + +_Left shoulder arms_ may be ordered directly from the order, right +shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command _arms_ execute +_port arms_ and continue in cadence to the position ordered. + +90. Being at order arms: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. + +Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly +bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to +the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking +swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left. + +Being at parade rest: 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. + +Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right +hip. + +91. Being at order arms: 1. _Trail_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle +forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30 deg. with the +vertical. + +When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the +piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the +piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used. + +92. Being at trail arms: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. + + +_Rifle Salute._ + +93. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_. + +Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm +horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined, +forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person +saluted. (_TWO_) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the +front. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._) + +94. Being at order or trail arms: 1. _Rifle_, 2. _SALUTE_. + +Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near +the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (_TWO_) Drop the left hand +by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front. + +For rules governing salutes, see "Honors and Salutes" (pars. 758-765). + + +_The Bayonet._ + +95. Being at order arms: 1. _Fix_, 2. _BAYONET_. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest; +grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body; +draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing +at the muzzle; resume the order. + +If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the +left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. + +96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix_, 2. _BAYONET_. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest; +grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing +the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet +until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece; +drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and, +glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing +between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right +hand and resume the order. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet +from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the +most convenient manner. + +If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the +most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the +original position. + +Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity but +not in cadence. + +97. _CHARGE BAYONET._ Whether executed at halt or in motion, the +bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of _guard_ in +the Manual for Bayonet Exercise. + +Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the +Manual for Bayonet Exercise. + + +_The Inspection._ + +98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_. + +At the second command take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) Seize +the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn +the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having +found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes +to the front. + +99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2. +_ARMS_. + +At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms, +complete the movement ordered. + + +_To Dismiss the Squad._ + +100. Being at halt: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Port_, 4. _ARMS_, +5. _DISMISSED_. + + + + +SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD. + + +101. Soldiers are grouped into squads for purposes of instruction, +discipline, control, and order. + +102. The squad proper consists of a corporal and seven privates. + +The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the +squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the +company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12, +they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted +as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more +squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon. + +For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. + +103. The corporal is the squad leader, and when absent is replaced by +a designated private. If no private is designated, the senior in +length of service acts as leader. + +The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front +rank of the squad. + +When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank +man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the +corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps +back into the rear rank. + +104. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the +integrity of squads; they designate new leaders to replace those +disabled, organize new squads when necessary, and see that every man +is placed in a squad. + +Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they +belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated +therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon +leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization. + +105. The squad executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and +_marchings_, and the _manual of arms_ as explained in the School of +the Soldier. + + +_To Form the Squad._ + +106. To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in front +of where the center is to be and commands: _FALL IN_. + +The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged +by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of +height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as +the man on his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with +distance of 40 inches. + +The instructor then commands: _COUNT OFF_. + +At this command all except the right file execute _eyes right_, and +beginning on the right, the men in each rank count _one_, _two_, +_three_, _four_; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he +counts. + +Pieces are then inspected. + + +_Alignments._ + +107. To align the squad, the base file or files having been +established: 1. _Right (Left)_, 2. _DRESS_, 3. _FRONT_. + +At the command _dress_ all men place the left hand upon the hip +(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base +file, when on or near the new line executes _eyes right_, and, taking +steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests +lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes +and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear +rank men cover in file. + +The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right +flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance, +of the line; only the men designated move. + +At the command _front_, given when the ranks are aligned, each man +turns his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his +side. + +In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or +parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique +directions. + +Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a +considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by +marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the +case may be, without other command, and at the trail. + +108. To preserve the alignment when marching: _GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT)_. + +The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding +to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the opposite +direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out +or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or +shortening the step; the rear rank men cover their file leaders at 40 +inches. + +In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank, +conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man +of the front rank is the guide. + + +_To Take Intervals and Distances._ + +109. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Take interval_, 2. _To the right +(left)_, 3. _MARCH_, 4. _Squad_, 5. _HALT_. + +At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and +halt; at the command _march_ all face to the right and the leading man +of each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each +following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast +of their file leaders. + +At the command _halt_, given when all have their intervals, all halt +and face to the front. + +110. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble, to the +right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear-rank man on the +right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by +the shortest line, and face to the front. + +111. Being in line at a halt and having counted off: 1. _Take +distance_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_. + +At the command _march_ No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the +front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of +the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each +stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command +_halt_ is given when all have their distances. + +In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the +movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right. + +112. Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. _Assemble_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to +their proper places in line. + + +_To Stack and Take Arms._ + +113. Being in line at a halt: _STACK ARMS_. + +Each even number of the front rank grasps his piece with the left hand +at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the +front, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center +of the interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the +stacking swivel; each even number of the rear rank then passes his +piece, barrel to the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between +the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in +advance of that of his own piece and opposite the right of the +interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and +forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of +his own piece; each odd number of the front rank raises his piece with +the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left +hand, guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the +swivel of his own piece with the free hook of that of the even number +of the rear rank; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle +formed by the other two pieces and lowers the butt to the ground, to +the right of and against the toe of his right shoe. + +The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the even numbers +of the front rank. + +When each man has finished handling pieces, he takes the position of +the soldier. + +114. Being in line behind the stacks: _TAKE ARMS_. + +The loose pieces are returned by the even numbers of the front rank; +each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the left +hand, the piece of his rear-rank man with his right hand, grasping +both between the hands; each odd number of the front rank grasps his +piece in the same way with the right hand, disengages it by raising +the butt from the ground and then, turning the piece to the right, +detaches it from the stack; each even number of the front rank +disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left, and then +passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume the +order. + +115. Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank +takes the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack; +the stacks made or broken, he resumes his post. + +Pieces not used in making the stack are termed _loose pieces_. + +Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. + + +_The Oblique March._ + +116. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or +correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right +or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and +explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march. + +117. 1. _Right (Left) oblique_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Each man steps off in a direction 45 deg. to the right of his original +front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders +parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line +or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel +to their original front. + +At the command _halt_ the men halt faced to the front. + +To resume the original direction: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to +the front. + +If at _half step_ or _mark time_ while obliquing, the oblique march is +resumed by the commands: 1. _Oblique_, 2. _MARCH_. + + +_To Turn on Moving Pivot._ + +118. Being in line: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same +ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces +to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the +rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then +execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving +abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while +at half step and take the full step without command as the last man +arrives on the line. + +_Right (Left) half turn_ is executed in a similar manner. The pivot +man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men +make quarter changes in obliquing. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + + +_To Turn on Fixed Pivot._ + +119. Being in line, to turn and march: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to +the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique +to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time. +In the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by +the second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his +front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time; +the other number of the rear rank moves straight to the front four +paces and places himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the +new line glance toward the marching flank while marking time and, as +the last man arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_, +without command. + +120. Being in line, to turn and halt: 1. _Squad right (left)_, 2. +_MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_. + +The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is +executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men, +on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is +given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last +man arrives on the line. + +121. Being in line, to turn about and march: 1. _Squad right (left) +about_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the second command, the front rank twice executes _squad right_, +initiating the second _squad right_ when the man on the marching flank +has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from +the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight +to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by +the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new +direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the +right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank. +The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position; +as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute _forward, march_, +without command. + +122. Being in line, to turn about and halt: 1. _Squad right (left) +about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _HALT_. + +The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is +executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men, +on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is +given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last +man arrives on the line. + + +_To Follow the Corporal._ + +123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without +unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and +commands: _FOLLOW ME_. + +If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the +trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the +movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative +positions. + +If in column; the head of the column follows the corporal. + + +_To Deploy as Skirmishers._ + +124. Being in any formation, assembled: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already +there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the +corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3 and +4 on his left, rear-rank men on the right of their file leaders, extra +men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's gait. + +When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on +No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as +the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad +when advancing and in rear when halted. + +When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the +trail unless otherwise ordered. + +The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank +is the guide. + +125. The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace, +resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a +squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. + + +_To Increase or Diminish Intervals._ + +126. If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the +normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or +decrease the interval: 1. _As skirmishers, (so many) paces_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already +deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide. + + +_The Assembly._ + +127. Being deployed: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places. + +If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time, +form, and follow him. + +The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. + + +_Kneeling and Lying Down._ + +128. If standing: _KNEEL_. + +Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left +rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as +possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece +remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the +lower band. + +129. If standing or kneeling: _LIE DOWN_. + +Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot +and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35 deg. to the right; +piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the +front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand +grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the +position of order arms, lying down. + +130. If kneeling or lying down: _RISE_. + +If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the +left heel. + +If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front, +on the ground marked by the knees. + +131. If lying down: _KNEEL_. Raise the body on both knees; take the +position of kneel. + +132. In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are +ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover. + +When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu +of the position kneeling. + + +_LOADINGS AND FIRINGS._ + +133. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether +standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at +a halt. + +When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not +load, aim, or fire. + +The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading. + +Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. + +134. Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without command +until the command _unload_, or _inspection arms_, fresh clips being +inserted when the magazine is exhausted. + +135. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be +done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated +before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the +target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case battle sight +is used if no sight setting is announced. + +136. The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight +setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be +repeated until a change of either or both is necessary. + +Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or +target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change +is ordered. + +137. If the men are not already in the position of load, that position +is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement +is omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing. + +138. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate firing +is discretionary with each man. + + +_To Load._ + +139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or +ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_. + +At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half +right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such +position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the +body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at +the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height +of the breast, and turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns +and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in +the clip slots, places the thumb on the powder space of the top +cartridge, the fingers extending around the piece and tips resting on +the magazine floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by +pressing down with the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the +bolt home, turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the +"safe" and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank +man moves to the right front, takes a similar position opposite the +interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of the piece +extending beyond the front rank, and loads. + +A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly +as practicable in the position of load. + +If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the +elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand +steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt +resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. + +For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down) +are designated as that of _load_. + +140. For instruction in loading: 1. _Simulate_, 2. _LOAD_. + +Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains "off" and +the handling of cartridges is simulated. + +The recruits are first taught to _simulate_ loading and firing; after +a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges +may be used. + +141. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine +"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or +"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the +proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to +be regarded as exceptional. + + +_To Unload._ + +142. _UNLOAD._ + +Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt +alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. +After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first +thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding +it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and +back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the +trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and +returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order. + + +_To Set the Sight._ + +143. _RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)_, or _BATTLE SIGHT_. + +The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains +and verifies sight settings. + + +_To Fire by Volley._ + +144. 1. _READY_, 2. _AIM_, 3. _Squad_, 4. _FIRE_. + +At the command _ready_ turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the +command _aim_ raise the piece with both hands and support the butt +firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping +the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the piece, right +elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a +little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right +eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the +object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against +the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight +is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight. + +Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file +leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece +beyond the front rank. + +In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of +elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported +by the knees. + +In aiming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both +elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder. + +At the command _fire_ press the finger against the trigger; fire +without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece; +lower the piece in the position of _Load_ and load. (_C.I.D.R., No. +2._) + +145. To continue the firing: 1. _AIM_, 2. _Squad_, 3. _FIRE_. + +Each command is executed as previously explained. _Load_ (from +magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with +the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." + + +_To Fire at Will._ + +146. _FIRE AT WILL._ + +Each man, independently of the others, comes to the _ready_, aims +carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, _fires_, +_loads_, and continues the firing until ordered to _suspend_ or _cease +firing_. + +147. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the +instructor shouts: _FASTER (SLOWER)_. + +Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at +effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum +of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate +the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat +conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are +designated. + + +_To Fire by Clip._ + +148. _CLIP FIRE._ + +Executed in the same manner as _fire at will_, except that each man, +after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, _suspends +firing_. + + +_To Suspend Firing._ + +149. The instructor blows a _long blast_ of the whistle and repeats +same, if necessary, or commands: _SUSPEND FIRING_. + +Firing stops; pieces are held loaded and locked, in a position of +readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The +men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at +which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear. + +This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to _cease firing_. + + +_To Cease Firing._ + +150. _CEASE FIRING._ + +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of +load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge +is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights +are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order. + +_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position or to steady the men. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 7._) + +151. Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time +after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has +actually commenced or not. + + +_THE USE OF COVER._ + +152. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual +use of cover. + +It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural +cover, he must be able to tire easily and effectively upon the enemy; +if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as +possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and +while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or +lying prone. + +153. To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time +concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in +simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching +positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from +depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to +fire around the right side of his concealment whenever possible, or, +when this is not possible, to rise enough to fire over the top of his +concealment. + +When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with +reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper +position for firing. + +154. The evil of remaining too long in one place, however good the +concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to advance from +cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his +concealment. + +It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an +enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from +a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and +throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing +from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle +grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right +leg. + +155. He should be taught that, when fired on while acting +independently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then +endeavor to locate his enemy. + +156. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued +in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be taught +that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the +effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question +of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not +move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better +to see the target. + + +_OBSERVATION._ + +157. The ability to use his eyes accurately is of great importance to +the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing his +surrounding from positions and when on the march. + +He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of +the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting +distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms. + +158. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they +should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming +point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a +designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone +position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked +eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in +estimating distances. + + + + +SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. + + +159. The captain is responsible for the theoretical and practical +instruction of his officers and noncommissioned officers, not only in +the duties of their respective grades, but in those of the next higher +grades. + +160. The company in line is formed in double rank with the men +arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from right to +left, the tallest on the right. + +The original division into squads is effected by the command: _COUNT +OFF_. The squads, successively from the right, count off as in the +School of the Squad, corporals placing themselves as Nos. 4 of the +front rank. If the left squad contains less than six men, it is either +increased to that number by transfers from other squads or is broken +up and its members assigned to other squads and posted in the line of +file closers. These squad organizations are maintained, by transfers +if necessary, until the company becomes so reduced in numbers as to +necessitate a new division into squads. No squad will contain less +than six men. + +161. The company is further divided into two, three, or four platoons, +each consisting of not less than two nor more than four squads. In +garrison or ceremonies the strength of platoons may exceed four +squads. + +162. At the formation of the company the platoons or squads are +numbered consecutively from right to left and these designations do +not change. + +For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the +designations, _right_, _center_, _left_, when in line, and _leading_, +_center_, _rear_, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads. +These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or +rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The _center +squad_ is the middle or right middle squad of the company. + +The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used. + +163. Platoons are assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned +officers, in order of rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center +(right center); 4, left center. + +[Illustration: Plate II. THE COMPANY.] + +The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one +to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to +platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its +guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader. + +During battle, these assignments are not changed: vacancies are filled +by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest +available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with +reenforcing troops. + +164. The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not +commanding a platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third +file from the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company +is deployed he accompanies the captain. + +The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his +rank as a sergeant. + +Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle, are in +ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed, they are posted in +the line of file closers. + +Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When +the company is deployed, they accompany the captain. + +165. The company executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and +_marchings_, _manual of arms_, _loadings_ and _firings_, _takes +intervals_ and _distances_ and _assembles_, _increases_ and +_diminishes intervals_, resumes _attention_, _obliques_, resumes the +direct march, preserves alignments, _kneels_, _lies down_, _rises_, +_stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier +and the Squad, substituting in the commands _company_ for _squad_. + +The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc., +substituting their designation for _squad_ in the commands. In the +same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company, +whenever possible, substituting their designation for _company_ in the +commands. + +166. A company so depleted as to make division into platoons +impracticable is led by the captain as a single platoon, but retains +the designation of company. The lieutenants and first sergeant assist +in fire control; the other sergeants place themselves in the firing +line as skirmishers. + + +CLOSE ORDER. + +_Rules._ + +167. The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear, platoons, +are the right and left, or leading and rear, guides, respectively, of +the company when it is in line or in column of squads. Other guides +are in the line of file closers. + +In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of +the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if +in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to +flanks of the platoon does not change. + +168. The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank +opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to +the other flank, the captain commands: 1. _File closers on left +(right) flank_; 2. _MARCH_. The file closers dart through the column; +the captain and guides change. + +In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side +of the guide. + +169. Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or +firings. + +Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual +of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at +the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. + +170. In _taking intervals and distances_, unless otherwise directed, +the right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in +the line of file closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces +from the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command _march_, the +file closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file +nearest him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their +positions in line. + +171. In movements executed simultaneously by platoons (as _platoons +right_ or _platoons, column right_), platoon leaders repeat the +preparatory command (_platoon right_, etc.), applicable to their +respective platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain +only. + + +_To Form the Company._ + +172. At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes position +6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be, faces +it, draws saber, and commands: _FALL IN_. + +The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front, +where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the +center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first +sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the +right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their +posts. + +The first sergeant commands: _REPORT_. Remaining in position at the +order, the squad leaders, in succession from the right, salute and +report: _All present_; or, _Private(s) ---- absent_. The first +sergeant does not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then +commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Order_, 4. _ARMS_, faces +about, salutes the captain, reports: _Sir, all present or accounted +for_, or the names of the unauthorized absentees, and, without +command, takes his post. + +If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant +commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. _Right shoulder_, 4. _ARMS_, +and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers _here_ +and executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into +squads and reports the company as prescribed above. + +The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and +facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first +sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber. + +The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported +and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is +formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. + +173. For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, +when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close +order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all +movements as explained for the front rank of a company. + + +_To Dismiss the Company._ + +174. Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first sergeant: +_Dismiss the company_. The officers fall out; the first sergeant +places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2 paces +from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward opposite +flank of the company, and commands: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_, 3. +_Port_, 4. _ARMS_, 5. _DISMISSED_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + + +_Alignments._ + +175. The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the +Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The +rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front +and covers his file leader. + +At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the +line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is +made, verifies the alignment, and commands: _FRONT_. + +Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify +alignments. + + +_Movements on the Fixed Pivot._ + +176. Being in line, to turn the company: 1. _Company right (left)_, 2. +_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_. + +At the second command the right-flank man in the front rank faces to +the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men oblique +to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time; in +the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the +second and first, moves straight to the front until in rear of his +front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and mark time; +the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the front 4 paces, +oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the third man, cover +their file leaders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes +post on the flank, and marks time. + +The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the +new line. + +The command _halt_ may be given at any time after the movement begins; +only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts +upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes +_front_ without command. + +177. Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: 1. +_Platoons right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_; or 3. +_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank +toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is +effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank. + +178. Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or, +being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: +1. _Squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left)_, 2. +_MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_. + +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. + +If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the +file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of +the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed +from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of +and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + + +_Movements on the Moving Pivot._ + +179. Being in line, to change direction: 1. _Right (Left) turn_, 2. +_MARCH_, 3. _Forward_, 4. _MARCH_. + +Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that the men +do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full +step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front +rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file +leader. + +180. Being in column of platoons, to change direction: 1. _Column +right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands: +_Right turn_. At the command _march_ the leading platoon turns to the +right on moving pivot; its leader commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_, +on completion of the turn. Rear platoons march squarely up to the +turning point of the leading platoon and turn at command of their +leaders. + +181. Being in column of squads, to change direction: 1. _Column right +(left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the +right on moving pivot as in the School of the Squad; the other ranks, +without command, turn successively on the same ground and in a similar +manner. + +182. Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the +reverse: 1. _Platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +183. Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction: 1. +_Squads right (left), column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Right +(Left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_. + +In the first case the right squad initiates the _column right_ as soon +as it has completed the _squad right_. + +In the second case, at the command _march_, the right squad marches +_forward_; the remainder of the company executes _squads right, +column left_, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he +has posted himself in front of the right squad, takes four short +steps, then resumes the full step; the right squad conforms. + +184. Being in line, to form line of platoons: 1. _Squads right (left), +platoons, column right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Platoons, right +(left) by squads_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the preceding +paragraph. + + +_Facing or Marching to the Rear._ + +185. Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or +squads, to face or march to the rear: 1. _Squads right (left) about_, +2. _MARCH_; or, 1. _Squads right (left) about_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. +_Company_, 4. _HALT_. + +Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad. + +If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers +turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each +darts through the nearest interval between squads. (_C.I.D.R., No. +2._) + +186. To march to the rear for a few paces: 1. _About_, 2. _FACE_, 3. +_Forward_, 4. _MARCH_. + +If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the +front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative +positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to +the original front. + + +_On Right (Left) Into Line._ + +187. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or +left: 1. _On right (left) into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. +_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_. + +At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: _Right +turn_. The leaders of the other units command: _Forward_, if at a +halt. At the second command, the leading unit turns to the right on +moving pivot. The command _halt_ is given when the leading unit has +advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its +leader then commands: _Right dress_. + +The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when +opposite the right of its place in line, executes _right turn_ at the +command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of +its leader, who then commands: _Right dress_. All dress on the first +unit in line. + +If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time +until halted. + + +_Front Into Line._ + +188. Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the front: +1. _Right (Left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. +_HALT_, 5. _FRONT_. + +At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading +one command: _Right oblique_. If at a halt, the leader of the leading +unit commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading unit moves +straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command +_halt_ is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired +distance; it halts; its leader then commands: _Left dress_. Each of +the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original +direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at +the command of its leader, who then commands: _Left dress_. All dress +on the first unit in line. + +189. Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being in +line of platoons, to form the company in line: 1. _Platoons, right +(left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Company_, 4. _HALT_, 5. +_FRONT_. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the +company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon. +If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment +before taking their posts; the captain commands _front_ when the +alignments have been verified. + +When _front into line_ is executed in double time the commands for +halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of +the first unit in line. + + +_AT EASE AND ROUTE STEP._ + +190. The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but _route +step_ and _at ease_ are applicable to any marching formation. + +191. To march at route step: 1. _Route step_, 2. _MARCH_. Sabers are +carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their pieces at +will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to preserve +silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve their +distance. If halted from route step, the men stand _at rest_. + +192. To march at ease: 1. _At ease_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The company marches as in route step, except that silence is +preserved; when halted, the men remain _at ease_. + +193. Marching at route step or at ease: 1. _Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_. + +At the command _attention_ the pieces are brought to the right +shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. + + +_TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS._ + +194. Being in column of squads: 1. _Right (left) by twos_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_ all files except the two right files of the +leading squad execute _in place halt_; the two left files of the +leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the +right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads +follow successively in like manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +195. Being in column of squads or twos: 1. _Right (left) by file_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, all files execute _in place halt_ except the +right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the +leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged +and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable +distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like +manner. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +196. Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or, +being in column of files, to form column of twos: 1. _Squads (Twos), +right (left) front into line_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_, the leading file or files halt. The remainder +of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the +leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and +successively form in rear of the first in like manner. + +The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered _right_ or +_left_, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions +in the two or squad. + +197. The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are +difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary +exercises. + +198. Marching by twos or files can not be executed without serious +delay and waste of road space. Every reasonable precaution will be +taken to obviate the necessity for these formations. + + +EXTENDED ORDER. + +_Rules for Deployment._ + +199. The command _guide right (left_ or _center)_ indicates the base +squad for the deployment; if in line it designates the actual _right +(left_ or _center)_ squad; if in column the command _guide right +(left)_ designates the _leading_ squad, and the command _guide center_ +designates the _center_ squad. After the deployment is completed, the +guide is _center_ without command, unless otherwise ordered. + +200. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, from either +column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the leader of the +base squad, when his squad does not advance), cautions his squad, +_follow me_ or _by the right (left) flank_, as the case may be; at the +command _march_, he steps in front of his squad and leads it to its +place in line. + +201. Having given the command for forming skirmish line, the captain, +if necessary, indicates to the corporal of the base squad the point on +which the squad is to march; the corporal habitually looks to the +captain for such directions. + +202. The base squad is deployed as soon as it has sufficient interval. +The other squads are deployed as they arrive on the general line; each +corporal halts in his place in line and commands or signals, _as +skirmishers_; the squad deploys and halts abreast of him. + +If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before +arriving on the line. + +203. Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the guide. +Within their respective fronts, individuals or units march so as best +to secure cover or to facilitate the advance, but the general and +orderly progress of the whole is paramount. + +On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the +enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down +if necessary. + +204. The company in skirmish line _advances_, _halts_, moves _by the +flank_, or _to the rear_, _obliques_, resumes _the direct march_, +passes from _quick_ to _double time_ and the reverse by the same +commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the +movement _by the flank_ or _to the rear_ is executed by the same +commands as when marching. _Company right (left, half right, half +left)_ is executed as explained for the front rank, skirmish intervals +being maintained. + +205. A platoon or other part of the company is deployed and marched in +the same manner as the company, substituting in the commands, +_platoon_ (_detachment_, etc.) for _company_. + + +_Deployments._ + +206. Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. _As +skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the +front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain +commands: 1. _Company_, 2. _HALT_. If the guide be _right (left)_, the +other corporals move to the _left (right)_ front, and, in succession +from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center, +the other corporals move to the _right_ or _left_ front, according as +they are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession +from the center squad place their squads on the line. + +If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other +squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior +squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained +comfortable marching distance. + +207. Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front: 1. +_As skirmishers, guide right (left_ or _center)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves +straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without +advancing. If the guide be _right (left)_, the other corporals move to +the _left (right) front_, and, in succession from the base, place +their squads on the line; if the guide be _center_, the corporals in +front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the +right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the +left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on +the line. + +The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in +like manner. + +208. The company in line or in column of squads may be deployed in an +oblique direction by the same commands. The captain points out the +desired direction; the corporal of the base squad moves in the +direction indicated; the other corporals conform. + +209. To form skirmish line to the flank or rear the line or the column +of squads is turned by squads to the flank or rear and then deployed +as described. + +210. The intervals between men are increased or decreased as described +in the School of the Squad, adding to the preparatory command, _guide +right (left_ or _center)_ if necessary. + + +_The Assembly._ + +211. The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the +element on which the company is to assemble and commands: 1. +_Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_. + +If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point +and the company is re-formed in line. If assembled by platoons, these +are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the +company is re-formed in line. + +Platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Platoons, assemble_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +Executed by each platoon as described for the company. + +One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: 1. _Such +platoon(s), assemble_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the +company. + + +_The Advance._ + +212. The advance of a company into an engagement (whether for attack +or defense) is conducted in close order, preferably column of squads, +until the probability of encountering hostile fire makes it advisable +to deploy. After deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of +the company may be continued in skirmish line or other suitable +formation, depending upon circumstances. The advance may often be +facilitated, or better advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by +the employment of the _platoon_ or _squad columns_ or by the use of a +_succession of thin lines_. The selection of the method to be used is +made by the captain or major, the choice depending upon conditions +arising during the progress of the advance. If the deployment is found +to be premature, it will generally be best to assemble the company and +proceed in close order. + +Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise. + +213. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Platoon columns_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their +respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to +the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like +manner to the right; each platoon lender thus conducts the march of +his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear +of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of +the advance. + +214. Being in skirmish line: 1. _Squad columns_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad +oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy +marching distances. + +215. _Platoon columns_ are profitably used where the ground is so +difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take +advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march +within the area of burst of a single shrapnel.[1] _Squad columns_ are +of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or +brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing +cover. + +[Footnote 1: Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.] + +216. To deploy platoon or squad columns: 1. _As skirmishers_, 2. +_MARCH_. + +Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place +themselves in their original positions on the line. + +217. Being in platoon or squad columns: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The platoon or squad leaders signal _assemble_. The men of each +platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right +and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on +the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon +or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point +indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is +re-formed in line. + +218. Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of thin lines: +1. _(Such numbers), forward_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of +the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the +front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly +as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance +(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the +character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar +commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has +advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is +halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first +and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line. + +Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a +squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The +first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the +second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from +right to left. + +The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a +faster gait. + +The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further +advance by the same means may be advisable. + +219. The advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide +stretch swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy, +long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its +purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to +engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious +(though temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage +lies in the fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less +likely to draw fire. + +220. The above are suggestions. Other and better formations may be +devised to fit particular cases. The best formation is the one which +advances the line farthest with the least loss of men, time, and +control. + + +_The Fire Attack._ + +221. The principles governing the advance of the firing line in attack +are considered in the School of the Battalion. + +When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as a whole by +ordinary means, it advances by rushes. + +222. Being in skirmish line: 1. _By platoon_ (_two platoons, squad, +four men_, etc.), _from the right (left)_, 2. _RUSH_. + +The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the +details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it +into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the +leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the +men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but +in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at +the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of +the rush) commands: _Follow me_, and, running at top speed, leads the +fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open +fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been +previously designated. + +The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next +like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further +command of the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire +company is on the line established by the first rush. + +If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon +leader conforms to the action of the senior. + +A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or +decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement. + +223. When the company forms a part of the firing line, the rush of the +company as a whole is conducted by the captain, as described for a +platoon in the preceding paragraph. The captain leads the rush; +platoon leaders lead their respective platoons; platoon guides follow +the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance. + +224. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes +impracticable, any method of advance that _brings the attack closer to +the enemy_, such as crawling, should be employed. + +For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 318 and 319. + + +_The Company in Support._ + +225. To enable it to follow or reach the firing line, the support +adopts suitable formations, following the principles explained in +paragraphs 212-218. + +The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after +deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in +close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when +necessary. + +226. The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of +reenforcements from it to the firing line are controlled by the major. + +A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will +be avoided whenever practicable. + +The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the +major's signals or commands. + +227. A reenforcement sent to the firing line joins it deployed as +skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement places it in an interval +in the line, if one exists, and commands it thereafter as a unit. If +no such suitable interval exists, the reenforcement is advanced with +increased intervals between skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest +interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the orders of the +nearest squad leader and platoon leader. + +228. A reenforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible +without exhausting the men. + +229. The original platoon division of the companies in the firing line +should be maintained and should not be broken up by the mingling of +reenforcements. + +Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a +reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have +been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their +normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed. +It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing +difficulties of control. + + +_The Company Acting Alone._ + +230. In general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according +to the principles applicable to the battalion acting alone; the +captain employs platoons as the major employs companies, making due +allowance for the difference in strength. + +The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with. + +231. The company must be well protected against surprise. Combat +patrols on the flanks are specially important. Each leader of a flank +platoon details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or +patrols on his flank. + + +FIRE. + +232. Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra ammunition is issued +before the company deploys for combat. + +In close order the company executes the firings at the command of the +captain, who posts himself in rear of the center of the company. + +Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only. + +233. When the company is deployed, the men execute the firings at the +command of their platoon leaders; the latter give such commands as are +necessary to carry out the captain's directions, and, from time to +time, add such further commands as are necessary to continue, correct, +and control the fire ordered. + +234. The voice is generally inadequate for giving commands during fire +and must be replaced by signals of such character that proper fire +direction and control is assured. To attract attention, signals must +usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of +the firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the +long blast signal as an aid to _cease firing_. Officers and men behind +the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but +must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the +prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their +immediate superiors and subordinates. + +235. The musicians assist the captain by observing the enemy, the +target, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and +by watching for signals. + +236. Firing with blank cartridges at an _outlined_ or _represented_ +enemy at distances less than 100 yards is prohibited. + +237. The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation +thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in +marksmanship, are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual. + + +_Ranges._ + +238. For convenience of reference ranges are classified as follows: + + 0 to 600 yards, close range. + 600 to 1,200 yards, effective range. + 1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range. + 2,000 yards and over, distant range. + +239. The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as +possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from training and +morale, this is the most important single factor in securing effective +fire at the longer ranges. + +240. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most +accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will +generally be to take the mean of several estimates. + +Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate +estimators in the company, are designated as _range estimators_ and +are specially trained in estimating distances. + +Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range +estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of +their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + + +_Classes of Firing._ + +241. _Volley firing_ has limited application. In defense it may be +used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large, +compact target. It may be used by troops executing _fire of position_. +When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can +be seen from the firing line, _ranging volleys_ may be used to correct +the sight setting. + +In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. + +242. _Fire at will_ is the class of fire normally employed in attack +or defense. + +243. _Clip fire_ has limited application. It is principally used: 1. +In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by habituating them +to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short burst of fire. + + +_The Target._ + +244. Ordinarily the major will assign to the company an objective in +attack or sector in defense; the company's target will lie within the +limits so assigned. In the choice of target, tactical considerations +are paramount; the nearest hostile troops within the objective or +sector will thus be the usual target. This will ordinarily be the +hostile firing line; troops in rear are ordinarily proper targets for +artillery, machine guns, or, at times, infantry employing fire of +position. + +Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons +therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under +conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops +comprising the former target. + +245. The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special +importance. + +The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each +platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his +position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on +that part of the target which is directly opposite him. + +246. All parts of the target are equally important. Care must be +exercised that the men do not slight its less visible parts. A section +of the target not covered by fire represents a number of the enemy +permitted to fire coolly and effectively. + +247. If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders +select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the +_aiming target_, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone +of fire into the target. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + + +_Fire Direction._ + +248. When the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it +is impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His +efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to +enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly +what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct +serious errors or omissions. + +249. The captain _directs_ the fire of the company or of designated +platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a +part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action +he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates +the class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire. +Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in +sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and +causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received +from the rear. + + +_Fire Control._ + +250. In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. From 20 to 35 rifles +are as many as one leader can control effectively. + +251. Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or +directions of the captain, having first taken such precautions to +insure correct sight setting and clear description of the target or +aiming target as the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he +gives such additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact +compliance with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when +necessary. He designates an aiming target when the target can not be +seen with the naked eye. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +252. In general, _platoon leaders_ observe the target and the effect +of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or +signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The _platoon +guides_ watch the firing line and check every breach of fire +discipline. _Squad leaders_ transmit commands and signals when +necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement, +assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing. + +253. The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. +Loss of control is an evil which robs success of its greatest results. +To avoid or delay such loss should be the constant aim of all. + +Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight +setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. + + +_Fire Discipline._ + +254. "Fire discipline implies, besides a habit of obedience, a control +of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which will enable +him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking +advantage of the ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of +fire; constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful +observation of the enemy; an increase of fire when the target is +favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy disappears; economy +of ammunition." (Small-Arms Firing Manual.) + +In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus +reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of +hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire +superiority. + +Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each +man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the +proper target. + +255. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire +discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire should be as rapid as +is consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the +visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper +rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually +rendering cautions or commands unnecessary. + +In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding +the assault, and in pursuing fire. + +256. In an advance by rushes, leaders of troops in firing positions +are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of +each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the +direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced +portions of the firing line. + +257. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon +leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point +where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly +with vigorous fire. + + + + +SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. + + +258. The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties +are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a +tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and +practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of the +companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the thoroughness +and uniformity of their instruction. + +In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be +directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting +only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may +be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper +control. + +259. The movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of +four companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more +companies, not exceeding six. + +260. The companies are generally arranged from right to left according +to the rank of the captains present at the formation. The arrangement +of the companies may be varied by the major or higher commander. + +After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative +order of the companies. + +261. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the companies are +designated numerically from right to left in line, and from head to +rear in column, _first company_, _second company_, etc. + +The terms _right_ and _left_ apply to actual right and left as the +line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right +company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left +center company. + +The designation center company indicates the right center or the +actual center company according as the number of companies is even or +odd. + +262. The band and other special units, when attached to the battalion, +take the same post with respect to it as if it were the nearest +battalion shown in Plate IV. + + +CLOSE ORDER. + +_Rules._ + +[Illustration: Plate III. THE BATTALION.] + +263. Captains repeat such preparatory commands as are to be +immediately executed by their companies, as _forward_, _squads right_, +etc.; the men execute the commands _march_, _halt_, etc., if applying +to their companies, when given by the major. In movements executed in +route step or at ease the captains repeat the command of execution, if +necessary. Captains do not repeat the major's commands in executing +the manual of arms, nor those commands which are not essential to the +execution of a movement by their companies, as _column of squads_, +_first company_, _squads right_, etc. + +In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter +designations of their companies, as _A Company, HALT_; _B Company, +squads right_, etc. + +264. At the command _guide center (right_ or _left)_, captains +command: _Guide right_ or _left_, according to the positions of their +companies. _Guide center_ designates the left guide of the center +company. + +265. When the companies are to be dressed, captains place themselves +on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as follows: + +The battalion in line: Beside the guide (or the flank file of the +front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front. + +The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in +prolongation of and facing down the line. + +Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: _FRONT_, and takes +his post. + +The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the +captain's command _dress_, or at the command _halt_, when it is +prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away +from the point of rest, with his piece at right shoulder, dresses +promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he +moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses +the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position +of order arms at the command _front_. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +266. The battalion executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ +and _marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_, +_lies down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the +Schools of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands +_battalion_ for _squad_. + +The battalion executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left) +about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, and _obliques_ and resumes the +_direct march_, as explained in the School of the Company. + +267. The battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files +changes direction; in column of squads forms column of twos or files +and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in the School of +the Company. + +268. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution by +companies or platoons of movements in the School of the Company the +major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing, when +necessary, _companies (platoons)_ to the commands prescribed therein: +as 1. _Companies, right front into line_, 2. _MARCH_. To complete such +simultaneous movements, the commands _halt_ or _march_, if +prescribed, are given by the major. The command _front_, when +prescribed, is given by the captains. + +269. The battalion as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in +firing saluting volleys. The commands are as for the company, +substituting _battalion_ for _company_. At the first command for +loading, captains take post in rear of the center of their respective +companies. At the conclusion of the firing, the captains resume their +posts in line. + +On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is +executed by company or other subdivision under instructions from the +major. + + +_To Form the Battalion._ + +270. For purposes other than ceremonies: The battalion is formed in +column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts +himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in +front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the +battalion; he draws saber; _adjutant's call_ is sounded or the +adjutant signals _assemble_. + +The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their +proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the +adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain +has saluted, faces the major and reports: _Sir, the battalion is +formed_. He then joins the major. + +271. For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion is formed in line. + +The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to +be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and +faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber; +_adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays if present. + +The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the +rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on +the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order +arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right +and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the +other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like +manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as +explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes +the guides to cover. + +When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and +dressed to the right against the arms of the guides. + +The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the +right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has +halted. + +When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant, +moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway +between the post of the major and the center of the battalion. + +The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their +posts. + +When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others +have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Guides_, 2. +_POSTS_, 3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_. At the second command guides take +their places in the line. The adjutant then turns about and reports to +the major: _Sir, the battalion is formed_; the major directs the +adjutant: _Take your post, Sir_; draws saber and brings the battalion +to the order. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the +major. + + +_To Dismiss the Battalion._ + +272. _DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES._ + +Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain +marches his company off and dismisses it. + + +_To Rectify the Alignment._ + +273. Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: 1. _Center +(right_ or _left)_, 2. _DRESS_. + +The captains dress their companies successively toward the center +(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain +next toward the indicated guide commands: _Front_. The captains of the +center companies (if the dress is _center_) dress them without waiting +for each other. + +274. To give the battalion a new alignment: 1. _Guides center (right_ +or _left) company on the line_, 2. _Guides on the line_, 3. _Center +(right_ or _left)_, 4. _DRESS_, 5. _Guides_, 6. _POSTS_. + +At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the +line (par. 271) facing the center (right or left). The major +establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the battalion. + +At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts, +facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line. + +At the command _dress_, each captain dresses his company to the flank +toward which the guides of his company face. + +At the command _posts_, given when all companies have completed the +dress, the guides return to their posts. + + +_To Rectify the Column._ + +275. Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if +the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is +desired to correct them, the major commands: 1. _Right (left)_, 2. +_DRESS_. + +Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so +as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to +the right and commands: _FRONT_. + + +_On Right (Left) into Line._ + +276. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _On right (left) into +line_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_. + +Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the +leading company commands: _Squads right_. If at a halt each captain in +rear commands: _Forward_. At the second command the leading company +marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march +to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite +its place, being marched in line to the right. + +The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the +desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the +right by its captain; the others complete the movement, each being +halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first company, +and then dressed to the right. + +Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the +first company commands: _Right turn_. If at a halt, each captain in +rear commands: _Forward_. Each of the captains in rear of the leading +company gives the command: 1. _Right turn_, in time to add, 2. +_MARCH_, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in +line. + +The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained +above. + +Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each +captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his +company forms line or changes direction to the right. + +If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time +until halted. + + +_Front into Line._ + +277. Being in column of squads or companies: 1. _Right (Left) front +into line_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the +leading company commands: _Column right_; the captains of the +companies in rear, _column half right_. At the second command the +leading company executes column right, and, as the last squad +completes the change of direction, is formed in line to the left, +halted, and dressed to the left. Each of the companies in rear is +conducted by the most convenient route to the rear of the right of the +preceding company, thence to the right, parallel to and 1 pace in rear +of the new line; when opposite its place, it is formed in line to the +left, halted, and dressed to the left. + +Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading +company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second +command; if at a halt, the leading company stands fast. At the first +command, the captain of each company in rear commands: _Squads right_, +or _Right by squads_, and after the second command conducts his +company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as +described above. + +Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each +captain halts when opposite or at the point where the left of his +company is to rest. + + +_To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left._ + +278. Being in column of squads: 1. _Column of companies, first +company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The +other companies move forward in column of squads and successively +march in line to the right on the same ground as the leading company +and in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding +company. + + +_To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left._ + +279. Being in column of companies: 1. _Column of squads, first +company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The leading company executes _squads right_ and moves forward. The +other companies move forward in column of companies and successively +march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the +leading company. + + +_To Change Direction._ + +280. Being in column of companies or close column: 1. _Column right +(left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The captain of the first company commands: _Right turn_. + +The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain +adding: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_, upon its completion. + +The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each +changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in +such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company. + +281. Being in line of companies or close line: 1. _Battalion right +(left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. _HALT_. + +The right company changes direction to the right; the other companies +are conducted by the shortest line to their places abreast of the +first. + +The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the +desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others +halt successively upon arriving on the line. + +282. Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by the +same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company. + + +_Mass Formations._ + +282 1-2. Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of +companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at +any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of +the battalion: 1. _Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at +(so many) paces, guide right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_, 3. _Battalion_, 4. +_HALT_. + +The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction +previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and +then halts. Each succeeding company (or subdivision) marches by the +most direct route to its place at the prescribed interval on the left +(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when +it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion. + +If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the +major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The +entire command forms column of squads and executes the movement in +conformity with the principles indicated above. (_C.I.D.R., No. 19._) + +283. Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies: 1. +_Close on first (fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_. + +If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is +halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is +halted in proper order in close column. + +If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of +the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of +the leading company form on the left of it. + +In close column formed from line on the first company, the left guides +cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on +the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In +close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading +company. + +The battalion in column closes on the leading company only. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._) + + +_To Extend the Mass._ + +284. Being in close column or in close line: 1. _Extend on first +(fourth) company_, 2. _MARCH_. + +Being in close line: If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; +if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away +from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line +of companies. + +Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company +only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies +in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow +at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies +in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance. + +Close column is not extended in double time. + +285. Being in close column: 1. _Right (left) front into line_, 2. +_MARCH_. Executed as from column of companies. + +286. Being in close column: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth) +company, squads right (left)_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each +of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow +the preceding company in column. + +287. Being in close line: 1. _Column of squads, first (fourth) +company, forward_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if +in march) successively take up the march and follow in column. + + +_Route Step and At Ease._ + +288. The battalion marches in _route step_ and _at ease_ as prescribed +in the School of the Company. When marching in column of companies or +platoons, the guides maintain the trace and distance. + +In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when +necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and +rear of their companies. + + +_Assembly._ + +289. The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the +companies being separated: 1. _Assemble_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or +point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled +and marched to the indicated point. As the companies arrive the major +or adjutant indicates the formation to be taken. + + +COMBAT PRINCIPLES. + +_Orders._ + +290. The following references to orders are applicable to attack or +defense. + +291. In extended order, the company is the largest unit to execute +movements by prescribed commands or means. The major, assembling his +captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the battalion by +means of _tactical orders_. He controls its subsequent movements by +such _orders_ or _commands_ as are suitable to the occasion. + +292. In every disposition of the battalion for combat the major's +order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of +the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and of the object +sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan. + +The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute +the _firing line_ and those which are to constitute the _support_. In +attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order +and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate +the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should +describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be +observed by each. + +293. When the battalion is operating alone, the major provides for the +reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger +force, the major makes similar provisions, when necessary, without +orders from higher authority, unless such authority has specifically +directed other suitable reconnaissance and protection. + +294. When the battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major, +he will indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed +in pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the +issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions +to the contrary. + + +_Deployment._ + +295. The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack +or defense. + +296. A premature deployment involves a long, disorganizing and +fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and should be avoided. A +greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when in dense column or +other close order formation; hence advantage should be taken of cover +in order to retain the battalion in close order formation until +exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be anticipated. + +297. The major regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent +and density of the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a +senior may have imposed. + +Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by +their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission +assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for +the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form +skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to +the base company. + +298. The commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as +part of a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the +firing line. By the judicious use of this force the major can exert an +influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control, +within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So if his battalion be +assigned to the _firing line_ the major will cause one, two, or three +companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the remaining +companies or company as a _support_ for that firing line. The division +of the battalion into firing line and support will depend upon the +front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity of the +action. + +299. If the battalion be part of a larger command, the number of +companies in the firing line will generally be determinable from the +regimental commander's order; the remainder constitutes the support. +If the battalion is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to +maintain the original fire power of the firing line, to protect the +flanks, and to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the +issue of the action. See paragraph 346. + +300. If the battalion is operating alone, the support may, according +to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind the +center, or one or both flanks of the firing line, or echeloned beyond +a flank. If the battalion is part of a larger force, the support is +generally held in one body. + +301. The distance between the firing line and the supporting group or +groups will vary between wide limits; it should be as short as the +necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. When cover is +available, the support should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when +such cover is not available, it should not be closer than 300 yards. +It may be as far as 500 yards in rear if good cover is there +obtainable and is not obtainable at a lesser distance. + +302. In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may be +necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing line +at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other +troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units, +thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The +necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of +the commander and of the service of information. + + +_Fire._ + +303. Fire direction and fire control are functions of company and +platoon commanders. The major makes the primary apportionment of the +target--in defense, by assigning sectors of fire; in attack, by +assigning the objective. In the latter case each company in the firing +line takes as its target that part of the general objective which lies +in its front. + +304. The major should indicate the point or time at which the fire +fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment or he may +follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it +be impracticable for him to do either, the senior officer with the +firing line, in each battalion, selects the time for opening fire. + + +_Attack._ + +305. The battalion is the _attack unit_, whether operating alone or as +part of a larger unit. + +306. If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major, +in executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as +vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it. +The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands, +in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership, +better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to +advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a +battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading +battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to +its destruction. + +307. The deployment having been made, the firing line advances without +firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon +as possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition +and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire +superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the +impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it +imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be +continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open +fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach +its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or +inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole, +to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire. + +308. Except when the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual +concentration of fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses +which are unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his +infantry; hence the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as +described above, and from which an effective fire can be directed +against the hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire +superiority. The effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so +as to permit further advance. The more effective the fire to which the +enemy is subjected the less effective will be his fire. + +309. Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry +employing fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will permit +the further advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it +will generally be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the +line. + +The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire +and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit. +Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary +from a company to a few men. + +The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire +superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the +number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other +hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the +progress of the attack. + +310. Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of +each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must +be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size; that is, +advances by rushes may first be made by company, later by half company +or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no subsequent +opportunity to _increase_ the rate of advance, such as better cover or +a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked. + +311. Whenever possible, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the +firing line. In the absence of express directions from the major, each +captain of a flank company determines when an advance by rushes shall +be attempted. A flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes +becomes the base company, if not already the base. An advance by +rushes having been inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the +firing line conforms; fractions rush successively from that flank and +halt on the line established by the initial rush. + +The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how +his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state +of the fire fight. + +312. A fraction about to rush is sent forward when the remainder of +the line is firing vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this +method of advancing is lost. + +The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon +the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire. + +313. When the entire firing line of the battalion has advanced to the +new line, fresh opportunities to advance are sought as before. + +314. Two identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence +at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before +the preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or +prearranged method of advancing by rushes. + +315. The major posts himself so as best to direct the reenforcing of +the firing line from the support. When all or nearly all of the +support has been absorbed by the firing line, he joins, and takes full +charge of, the latter. + +316. The reenforcing of the firing line by driblets of a squad or a +few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no +reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons will be +sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the firing line. + +317. To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which +reenforcements may be placed, the companies in the firing line should +be kept closed in on their centers as they become depleted by +casualties during the advance. + +When this is impracticable, reenforcements must mingle with and +thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule +rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such +conditions the combat exercises of the battalion should include both +methods of reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary +intervals for reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line +should be thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses +during the various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion +of the firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half +of its strength. + +318. The major or senior officer in the firing line determines when +bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command or signal. It is +repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man who was in the +front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he recognizes the command +or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his bayonet, and immediately +resumes firing; after which the other men suspend firing, fix +bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The support also fixes +bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by the firing line at +drill does not simulate battle conditions and should not be required. +It is essential that there be no marked pause in the firing. Bayonets +will be fixed generally before or during the last, or second last, +advance preceding the charge. + +319. Subject to orders from higher authority, the major determines the +point from which the charge is to be made. The firing line having +arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the +_charge_ to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all +parts of the line. The company officers lead the charge. The +skirmishers spring forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and +close with the enemy. + +The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon +circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in +pursuing fire; they may advance a short distance to obtain a field of +fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity; they may assemble or +reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates his position every effort should +be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of +the attacking troops being of secondary importance to the infliction +of further losses upon the enemy and to the increase of his confusion. +In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate +the assault accordingly. + + +_Defense._ + +320. In defense, as in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best +suited to independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually +divided into sections and a battalion assigned to each. + +321. The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches +and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies to +construct them and details the troops to occupy them. + +322. The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with the +principles applicable to, and explained in connection with, the +attack, maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are +necessary to prevent the enemy's advance. + +323. The supply of ammunition being usually ample, fire is opened as +soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his +advance, or inflict material loss, but this rule must be modified to +suit the ammunition supply. + +324. The major causes the firing line and support to fix bayonets when +an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains direct this to be done +if they are not in communication with the major and the measure is +deemed advisable. + +Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack. +The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or +position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the +hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves. + +325. If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile infantry fire +or in the presence of hostile infantry, the support will be posted so +as to cover the retirement of the firing line. + +326. When the battalion is operating alone, the support must be strong +and must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a +counterattack is planned. Opportunities for counterattack should be +sought at all times. + + + + +THE REGIMENT. + + +[Illustration: Plate IV. THE REGIMENT.] + +327. Normally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but these +regulations are applicable to a regiment of two or more battalions. +Special units, such as band, machine-gun company, and mounted scouts, +have special formations for their own use. Movements herein +prescribed are for the battalions; special units conform thereto +unless otherwise prescribed or directed. + +328. The colonel is responsible for the theoretical instruction and +practical training of the regiment as a whole. Under his immediate +supervision the training of the units of the regiment is conducted by +their respective commanders. + +329. The colonel either gives his commands or orders orally, by bugle, +or by signal, or communicates them by staff officers or orderlies. + +Each major gives the appropriate commands or orders, and, in +close-order movements, causes his battalion to execute the necessary +movements at his command of execution. Each major ordinarily moves his +battalion from one formation to another, in column of squads, in the +most convenient manner, and, in the presence of the enemy, in the most +direct manner consistent with cover. + +Commanders of the special units observe the same principles as to +commands and movements. They take places in the new formation as +directed by the colonel; in the absence of such directions they +conform as nearly as practicable to Plate IV, maintaining their +relative positions with respect to the flank or end of the regiment on +which they are originally posted. + +330. When the regiment is formed, and during ceremonies, the +lieutenant colonel is posted 2 paces to the left of, and 1 pace less +advanced than the colonel. In movements subsequent to the formation of +the regiment and other than ceremonies, the lieutenant colonel is on +the left of the colonel. + +331. In whatever formation the regiment may be, the battalions retain +their permanent administrative designations of _first_, _second_, +_third battalion_. For convenience, they may be designated, when in +line, as _right_, _center_, or _left battalion_; when in column, as +_leading_, _center_, or _rear battalion_. These designations apply to +the actual positions of the battalions in line or column. + +332. Except at ceremonies, or when rendering honors, or when otherwise +directed, after the regiment is formed, the battalions march and stand +_at ease_ during subsequent movements. + + +CLOSE ORDER. + +_To Form the Regiment._ + +333. Unless otherwise directed, the battalions are posted from right +to left, or from head to rear, according to the rank of the battalion +commanders present, the senior on the right or at the head. A +battalion whose major is in command of the regiment retains its place. + +334. For ordinary purposes, the regiment is formed in column of squads +or in column of masses. + +The adjutant informs the majors what the formation is to be. The +battalions and special units having been formed, he posts himself and +draws saber. _Adjutant's call_ is sounded, or the adjutant signals +_assemble_. + +If forming in column of squads, the adjutant posts himself so as to be +facing the column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be +occupied by the leading guide of the regiment; if forming in column of +masses, he posts himself so as to be facing the right guides of the +column when formed, and 6 paces in front of the place to be occupied +by the right guide of the leading company. Later, he moves so as best +to observe the formation. + +The battalions are halted, at attention, in column of squads or close +column, as the case may be, successively from the front in their +proper order and places. The band takes its place when the leading +battalion has halted. Other special units take their places in turn +when the rear battalion has halted. + +The majors and the commanders of the machine-gun company and mounted +scouts (or detachment) each, when his command is in place, salutes the +adjutant and commands: _At ease_; the adjutant returns the salutes. +When all have saluted and the band is in place, the adjutant rides to +the colonel, reports: _Sir, the regiment is formed_, and takes his +post. The colonel draws saber. + +The formation in column of squads may be modified to the extent +demanded by circumstances. Prior to the formation the adjutant +indicates the point where the head of the column is to rest and the +direction in which it is to face: he then posts himself so as best to +observe the formation. At _adjutant's call_ or _assemble_ the leading +battalion marches to, and halts at, the indicated point. The other +battalions take positions from which they may conveniently follow in +their proper places. + +335. For ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment is formed in line +or line of masses. + +The adjutant posts himself so as to be 6 paces to the right of the +right or leading company of the right battalion when the regiment is +formed and faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. +_Adjutant's call_ is sounded; the band plays. + +The adjutant indicates to the adjutant of the right battalion the +point of rest and the direction in which the line is to extend, and +then takes post facing the regiment midway between the post of the +colonel and the center of the regiment. Each of the other battalion +adjutants precedes his battalion to the line and marks its point of +rest. + +The battalions, arriving from the rear, each in line or close column, +as the case may be, are halted on the line successively from right to +left in their proper order and places. Upon halting, each major +commands: 1. _Right_, 2. _DRESS_. The battalion adjutant assists in +aligning the battalion and then takes his post. + +The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the +right battalion has halted; it ceases playing when the left battalion +has halted. The machine-gun company and the mounted scouts (or +detachment) take their places in line after the center battalion has +halted. + +The colonel and those who accompany him take post. + +When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and all +others have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. _Present_, +2. _ARMS_. He then turns about and reports to the colonel: _Sir, the +regiment is formed_; the colonel directs the adjutant: _Take your +post, Sir_, draws saber and brings the regiment to the order. The +adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the colonel. + + +_To Dismiss the Regiment._ + +336. Being in any formation: _DISMISS YOUR BATTALIONS_. Each major +marches his battalion off and dismisses it. + + +_Movements by the Regiment._ + +337. The regiment executes the _halt_, _rests_, _facings_, _steps_ and +_marchings_, _manual of arms_, resumes _attention_, _kneels_, _lies +down_, _rises_, _stacks_ and _takes arms_, as explained in the Schools +of the Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands, when +necessary, _battalions_ for _squad_. + +The regiment executes _squads right (left)_, _squads right (left) +about_, _route step_ and _at ease_, _obliques_ and resumes the direct +march as explained in the School of the Company. + +The regiment in column of files, twos, squads, or platoons, changes +direction, and in column of squads forms column of twos or files and +re-forms column of twos or squads, as explained in the School of the +Company. In column of companies, it changes direction as explained in +the School of the Battalion. + +338. When the formation admits of the simultaneous execution, by +battalions, companies, or platoons, of movements prescribed in the +School of the Company or Battalion, the colonel may cause such +movements to be executed by prefixing, where necessary, _battalions +(companies, platoons)_, to the commands prescribed therein. + +339. The column of squads is the usual column of march; to shorten the +column, if conditions permit, a double column of squads may be used, +the companies of each battalion marching abreast in two columns. +Preliminary to an engagement, the regiment or its units will be placed +in the formation best suited to its subsequent tactical employment. + +340. To assume any formation, the colonel indicates to the majors the +character of the formation desired, the order of the battalions, and +the point of rest. Each battalion is conducted by its major, and is +placed in its proper order in the formation, by the most convenient +means and route. + +Having halted in a formation, no movements for the purpose of +correcting minor discrepancies in alignments, intervals, or distances +are made unless specially directed by the colonel or necessitated by +conditions of cover. + +341. To correct intervals, distances, and alignments, the colonel +directs one or more of the majors to rectify their battalions. Each +major so directed causes his battalion to correct its alignment, +intervals, and distances, and places it in its proper position in the +formation. + + +_COMBAT PRINCIPLES._ + +342. The regiment is deployed by the colonel's order to the commanders +of battalions and special units. The order should give them +information of the situation and of the proposed plan of action. In +attack, the order should assign to each battalion not in reserve its +objective or line of advance. In defense, it should assign to each its +sector. In either case it should designate the troops for, and the +position of, the reserve and prescribe the employment of the machine +guns and mounted scouts. + +Both in attack and defense the order may fix the front to be covered +in the deployment. + +Encroachment upon the proper functions of subordinates and unnecessary +details should be studiously avoided. When the regiment deploys, the +colonel habitually places the band at the disposal of the surgeon for +employment in caring for the wounded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +343. The regiment, when operating alone and attacking, should +undertake an enveloping attack if it does not result in overextension. + +Assuming a regiment of 1,500 rifles, an extension of more than 1,000 +yards between its extreme flanks when making an enveloping attack +alone is seldom justifiable; when part of a battle line, a front of +500 yards can rarely be exceeded. + +344. In defense the front occupied when acting alone or posted on or +near the flank of a battle line should seldom exceed 600 yards; when +posted as an interior regiment, the front may be increased to 800 +yards. The front may be somewhat longer than in the attack, since +smaller battalion supports are justifiable. When the regiment is +operating alone, however, the regimental reserve should be as strong +in the defense as in the attack unless the flanks are secure. + +345. The colonel should always hold out a reserve--generally one +battalion; but when the regiment is operating alone, it is generally +advisable to hold out more at first. + +346. Whereas the support held out in each battalion of the firing line +is intended to thicken the diminishing firing line at the proper times +and sometimes to lengthen it, the reserve held out in a regiment +operating alone is used for this purpose only as a last resort. Its +primary functions are: In attack, to protect the flanks, to improve +fully the advantage following a victory, or to cover defeat; in +defense, to prolong the firing line, to effect a counterattack, or to +cover withdrawal. It is the colonel's chief means of influencing an +action once begun. It should be conserved to await the proper moment +for its employment; the combat will seldom come to a successful issue +without its employment in some form. + +The reserve of a regiment operating as part of a large force becomes a +local reserve. It replaces depleted supports and in attack strengthens +and protects the firing line in the charge. + + + + +THE BRIGADE. + + +347. The brigade does not engage in prescribed drills. It engages in +route marches and battle or other tactical exercises. These are +conducted pursuant to commands or orders formulated to suit the +conditions of the proposed movement or exercise, and, in general, in +accordance with the principles applicable to the regiment. + +348. A brigade of about 4,000 rifles, as part of a general battle +line, would be deployed on a front of not more than 1,200 yards in +attack or 1,600 yards in defense. + +When acting alone the distance between extreme flanks in an enveloping +attack should not exceed 2,000 yards at the time the attacking +infantry opens fire. + +When acting alone, the front in defense should not exceed 1,600 yards. + +These limits apply to the original deployment of the brigade for +combat and presuppose an enemy of equal or nearly equal training and +morale. The limits necessitated by the subsequent progress of the +combat can not be foreseen. + +349. Units larger than the brigade are generally composed of all arms. +Combined tactics are considered in the Field Service Regulations. + + + + +PART II.--COMBAT. + + + + +INTRODUCTION. + + +350. Part II of these regulations treats only of the basic principles +of combat tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units, +such as machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry +regiments and battalions. + +The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field +Service Regulations. + +351. Modern combat demands the highest order of training, discipline, +leadership, and morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated +maneuvers are impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination +to win by simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success. + +352. The duties of infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must +be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires +but one kind of infantry--good infantry. + +353. The infantry must take the offensive to gain decisive results. +Both sides are therefore likely to attempt it, though not necessarily +at the same time or in the same part of a long battle line. + +In the local combats which make up the general battle the better +endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training +will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes +which enable the commanding general to win the battle. + +354. The infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage +gained, the individual and collective discipline and skill needed to +master the enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in +attack, and to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be +trained to bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and +march. + +Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but +lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale. + +355. It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give general +instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and noncommissioned +officers must be so trained that they can apply suitable means and +methods to each case as it arises. Study and practice are necessary to +acquire proper facility in this respect. Theoretical instruction can +not replace practical instruction; the former supplies correct ideas +and gives to practical work an interest, purpose, and definiteness not +otherwise obtainable. + +356. After the mechanism of extended order drill has been learned with +precision in the company, every exercise should be, as far as +practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise) against an +_imaginary_, _outlined_, or _represented_ enemy. + +Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a +tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of +the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical +situation. + +357. An effective method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline +the enemy with a few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector +states the situation and the commander leads his troops with due +regard to the assumptions made. + +Changes in the situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character +of artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when +necessary by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and +influence the conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing +line. From this position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged +signals, the character of the fire and movements of the hostile +infantry. These signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy. +These men repeat the signals; all officers and men engaged in the +exercise and in sight of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the +enemy's action and the exercise is conducted accordingly. + +Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may +assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the +conduct of the exercise. + +An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend. + +Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise +the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper +movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all +movements of troops or individuals that would be impossible if the +enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the +battle field can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will +prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate +of progress. + +The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and +under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a +fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed +or prearranged systems are prohibited. + + + + +LEADERSHIP. + + +_General Considerations._ + +358. The art of leadership consists of applying sound tactical +principles to concrete cases on the battle field. + +Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of +teamwork are the fundamental characteristics of successful leadership. + +359. A correct grasp of the situation and a definite plan of action +form the soundest basis for a successful combat. + +A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be +abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed. +Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of +details in the original plan. + +360. Combats that do not promise success or some real advantage to the +general issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair +the morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy. + +361. Complicated maneuvers are not likely to succeed in war. All plans +and the methods adopted for carrying them into effect must be simple +and direct. + +362. Order and cohesion must be maintained within the units if success +is to be expected. + +363. Officers must show themselves to be true leaders. They must act +in accordance with the spirit of their orders and must require of +their troops the strictest discipline on the field of battle. + +364. The best results are obtained when leaders know the capacity and +traits of those whom they command; hence in making detachments units +should not be broken up, and a deployment that would cause an +intermingling of the larger units in the firing line should be +avoided. + +365. Leading is difficult when troops are deployed. A high degree of +training and discipline and the use of close order formations to the +fullest extent possible are therefore required. + +366. In order to lighten the severe physical strain inseparable from +infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must be made to spare +the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when necessity +arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted. + +367. When officers or men belonging to fighting troops leave their +proper places to carry back, or to care for, wounded during the +progress of the action, they are guilty of skulking. This offense must +be repressed with the utmost vigor. + +368. The complete equipment of the soldier is carried into action +unless the weather or the physical condition of the men renders such +measure a severe hardship. In any event, only the pack[2] will be laid +aside. The determination of this question rests with the regimental +commander. The complete equipment affords to men lying prone +considerable protection against shrapnel. + +[Footnote 2: The "pack" includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.] + +369. The post of the commander must be such as will enable him to +observe the progress of events and to communicate his orders. +Subordinate commanders, in addition, must be in position to transmit +the orders of superiors. + +Before entering an action the commander should be as far to the front +as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order +the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his +own wishes. + +During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the +detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his +own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and +easy communication with it. + +A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when +the line has absorbed his whole command. + +When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward +in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to +the best advantage. + +370. The latitude allowed to officers is in direct proportion to the +size of their commands. Each should see to the general execution of +his task, leaving to the proper subordinates the supervision of +details, and interfering only when mistakes are made that threaten to +seriously prejudice the general plan. + + +_Teamwork._ + +371. The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units increase the +difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be given great +latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of the whole +depends largely upon how well each subordinate coordinates his work +with the general plan. + +A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but +responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer. + +372. In a given situation it is far better _to do any intelligent +thing_ consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan, +than to search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of +conduct for subordinates who are required to act upon their own +initiative. + +A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such +as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in +possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead +confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his +superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to +further the general plan. + +373. Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of +subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted +spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all +must conform. + +Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does +all in his power to insure cooperation between the subdivisions under +his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or +to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received, +keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation. + +374. When circumstances render it impracticable to consult the +authority issuing an order, officers should not hesitate to vary from +such order when it is clearly based upon an incorrect view of the +situation, is impossible of execution, or has been rendered +impracticable on account of changes which have occurred since its +promulgation. In the application of this rule the responsibility for +mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but unwillingness to assume +responsibility on proper occasions is indicative of weakness. + +Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience +where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general +plan. + +375. When the men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line, +all officers and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and +platoon guides seek to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each +seizes any opportunity to exercise the functions consistent with his +grade, and all assist in the maintenance of order and control. + +Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete +restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other +conditions permit. + +376. Any officer or noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from +his proper unit and can not rejoin must at once place himself and his +command at the disposal of the nearest higher commander. + +Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his +proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops +engaged with the enemy. + +377. Soldiers are taught the necessity of remaining with their +companies, but those who become detached must join the nearest company +and serve with it until the battle is over or reorganization is +ordered. + + +_Orders._ + +378. Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the orders of the +commander to the subordinate commanders. + +The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably +written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is +preferable and is used whenever time permits. + +If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as +field orders or messages. + +379. The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are +given verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders +are intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the +situation and plan can be explained. + +Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written +messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and +unmistakable. + +380. The initial combat order of any commander or subordinate is based +upon his definite plan for executing the task confronting him. + +Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal +reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all +information of the enemy. + +381. The combat order gives such information of the enemy and of +neighboring or supporting friendly troops as will enable subordinates +to understand the situation. + +The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the +commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of +the subordinates. + +Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken +in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander +assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in +accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas +and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be +correspondingly satisfactory. + +Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains, +ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns +the combat itself. + +Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank +protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an +omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared. + +382. When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly _what_ +is to be done by each subordinate, but not _how_ it is to be done. He +should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by prescribing +details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt the ability or +judgment of the subordinate, and can not substitute another. + +Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be +the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates +either vacillation or the inability to formulate orders. + +383. Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and are given +to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an emergency a +commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to any +subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the intermediate +commander concerned. + + +_Communication._ + +384. Communication is maintained by means of staff officers, +messengers, relay systems, connecting files, visual signals, +telegraph, or telephone. + +385. The signal corps troops of the division establish lines of +information from division to brigade headquarters. The further +extension of lines of information in combat by signal troops is +exceptional. + +386. Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is responsible for +the maintenance of communication from the colonel back to the brigade +and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the regiment uses the +various means which may be furnished it. The staff and orderlies, +regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of these means and +in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags. + +387. Connection between the firing line and the major or colonel is +practically limited to the prescribed flag, arm, and bugle signals. +Other means can only be supplemental. Company musicians carry company +flags and are practiced in signaling. + +388. The artillery generally communicates with the firing line by +means of its own staff officers or through an agent who accompanies +some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him informed as to +the situation and affords him any reasonable assistance. When the +infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support, perfect +coordination through this representative is of great importance. + + + + +COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE. + + +389. Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must not be +neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on wrong +lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be +prevented. + +390. Troops deployed and under fire can not change front and thus they +suffer greatly when enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may +suffer heavy losses in a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In +both formations troops must be protected by proper reconnaissance and +warning. + +391. The difficulty of reconnaissance increases in proportion to the +measures adopted by the enemy to screen himself. + +The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the +character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile +screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary +in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander +or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person. + +A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for +small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for +them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain +signal communication with the main body if practicable. + +392. Each separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to +its front and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The +extent of the reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation +of the columns. + +393. Before an attack a reconnaissance must be made to determine the +enemy's position, the location of his flanks, the character of the +terrain, the nature of the hostile field works, etc., in order to +prevent premature deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of +time. + +It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line +in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position. + +394. It will frequently be impossible to obtain satisfactory +information until after the action has begun. The delay that may be +warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends upon the nature of +the attack and the necessity for promptness. For example, in a meeting +engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack, the reconnaissance may +have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an attack against an +enemy carefully prepared for defense there will generally be both time +and necessity for thorough reconnaissance. + +395. In defense, reconnaissance must be kept up to determine the +enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his dispositions, to prevent his +reconnaissance, etc. + +Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should +relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by +firing on small bodies of the enemy. + +396. Reconnaissance continues throughout the action. + +A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks +are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of +flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat +patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are +indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or +defense. + +397. The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be posted in a certain +direction does not relieve infantry commanders of the responsibility +for reconnaissance and security. + +To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense. + +398. The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line +invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on +that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In any +event, he sends out combat patrols as needed. + +Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a +considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section, +he makes similar provision. + +399. Battalion commanders in the first line establish patrols to +observe and report the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when +these can not be seen. + + + + +FIRE SUPERIORITY. + + +_PURPOSE AND NATURE._ + +400. In a decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining +fire superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then +to keep it. + +Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach +the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when +the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such +superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable +and without ruinous losses. + +Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the +enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him. + +401. To obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy +volume of accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the +fire means a corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the +enemy's fire. + +The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several +considerations: + +(_a_) _The number of rifles employed._ On a given front the greatest +volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient +intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The +maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard +of front. + +(_b_) The _rate_ of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces +its accuracy. + +(_c_) _The character of the target_ influences both volume and +accuracy. Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range +increase the rate of fire; greater density increases the effect. + +(_d_) _Training and discipline_ have an important bearing on the rate +or volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy. + +The firing efficiency, of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse +psychological influences. + +(_e_) _Fire direction and control_ improve collective accuracy. The +importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control +exerts a powerful influence at all ranges. + + +_FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL._ + +_Opening Fire._ + +402. Beyond effective ranges important results can be expected only +when the target is large and distinct and much ammunition is used. + +Long-range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral +effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire +is of doubtful value. + +403. In attack, the desire to open fire when losses are first felt +must be repressed. Considerations of time, target, ammunition, and +morale make it imperative that the attack withhold its fire and press +forward to a first firing position close to the enemy. The attacker's +target will be smaller and fainter than the one he presents to the +enemy. + +404. In defense, more ammunition is available, ranges are more easily +determined, and the enemy usually presents a larger target. The +defender may therefore open fire and expect results at longer ranges +than the attacker, and particularly if the defenders intend a delaying +action only. + +If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the +defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a +specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire +are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much +artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed +signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire. + +405. In unexpected, close encounters a great advantage accrues to the +side which first opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight. + + +_Use of Ground._ + +406. The position of the firers must afford a suitable field of fire. + +The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet +enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing. + +Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground, +either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on +another target. + +407. The likelihood of a target being hit depends to a great extent +upon its visibility. By skillful use of ground, a firing line may +reduce its visibility without loss of fire power. Sky lines are +particularly to be avoided. + + +_Choice of Target._ + +408. The target chosen should be the hostile troops most dangerous to +the firers. These will usually be the nearest hostile infantry. When +no target is specially dangerous, that one should be chosen which +promises the most hits. + +409. Frequent changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes +to small, unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish +nothing. Attention should be confined to the main target until +substantial reason for change is apparent. + +410. An opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against +artillery protected in front by shields, is an example warranting +change of target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes +the troops subjected to it, even if the losses inflicted are small. +In this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce +important results. + + +_The Range._ + +411. Beyond close range, the correct setting of the rear sight is of +primary importance, provided the troops are trained and well in hand. +The necessity for correct sight setting increases rapidly with the +range. Its importance decreases as the quality of the troops decrease, +for the error in sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges, +becomes unimportant when compared with the error in holding and +aiming. + +412. In attack, distances must usually be estimated and corrections +made as errors are observed. Mechanical range finders and ranging +volleys are practicable at times. + +In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the +distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future +use. + + +_Distribution of Fire and Target._ + +413. The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible, +but at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it +harmless. To accomplish this the target must be covered with fire +throughout its whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire +with nearly peace-time accuracy. + +The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No +part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping +in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept +under fire even during a rush. + + +_Observation._ + +414. The correctness of the sight setting and the distribution of fire +over the target can be verified only by careful observation of the +target, the adjacent ground, and the effect upon the enemy. + +415. Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is being +properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy and +effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining superiority. If +the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and persistent, he +realizes that corrective measures are necessary to increase either +volume or accuracy, or both. + + +_Discipline._ + +416. Discipline makes good direction and control possible and is the +distinguishing mark of trained troops. + +417. The discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless +officers and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the +men. In the company, therefore, communication must be by simple +signals which, in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and +convey the correct meaning. + + +_Expenditure of Ammunition._ + +418. In attack the supply is more limited than in defense. Better +judgment must be exercised in expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the +firing line of an attack can not expect to have that day more +ammunition than they carry into the combat, except such additions as +come from the distribution of ammunition of dead and wounded and the +surplus brought by reinforcements. + +419. When a certain fire effect is required, the necessary ammunition +must be expended without hesitation. Several hours of firing may be +necessary to gain fire superiority. True economy can be practiced only +by closing on the enemy before first opening fire and thereafter +suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at. + + +_Supporting Artillery._ + +420. Artillery fire is the principal aid to the infantry in gaining +and keeping fire superiority, not only by its hits, but by the moral +effect it produces on the enemy. + +421. In attack, artillery assists the forward movement of the +infantry. It keeps down the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to +neutralize the hostile infantry by inflicting losses upon it, +destroying its morale, driving it to cover, and preventing it from +using its weapons effectively. + +In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack +reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining +its fire power to that of the defending infantry. + +422. Troops should be accustomed to being fired over by friendly +artillery and impressed with the fact that the artillery should +continue firing upon the enemy until the last possible moment. The +few casualties resulting from shrapnel bursting short are trifling +compared with those that would result from the increased effectiveness +of the enemy's infantry fire were the friendly artillery to cease +firing. + +Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until +the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart. + +423. When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so +short as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the +commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted signal,[3] +informs the artillery commander. The latter usually increases the +range in order to impede the strengthening of the enemy's foremost +line. + +[Footnote 3: With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.] + + +_Fire of Position._ + +424. Infantry is said to execute fire of position when it is posted so +as to assist an attack by firing over the heads, or off the flank, of +the attacking troops and is not itself to engage in the advance; or +when, in defense, it is similarly posted to augment the fire of the +main firing line. + +Machine guns serve a like purpose. + +In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the +terrain permits and reserve infantry is available. + + + + +DEPLOYMENT. + + +425. Troops are massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of +their deployment can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the +column or to clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large +commands, whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether +forming for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed +into a line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior +to deploying. + +The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take +advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in +forming the firing line. + +426. In deploying the division each brigade is assigned a definite +task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade commander +conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments until it is +advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then issues his +order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable. In a +similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments forward +in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for issuing +the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the battalion +before issuing orders for its deployment. + +427. Each subordinate commander, after receiving his order for the +action, should precede his command as far as possible, in order to +reconnoiter the ground personally, and should prepare to issue his +orders promptly. + +428. Each commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance +to front and flank; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground +he guards against surprise. + +429. The premature formation of the firing line causes unnecessary +fatigue and loss of time, and may result in a faulty direction being +taken. Troops once deployed make even minor changes of direction with +difficulty, and this difficulty increases with the length of the +firing line. + +430. In the larger units, when the original deployment is found to be +in the wrong direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the +reserve on the correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line. + +431. To gain decisive results, it will generally be necessary to use +all the troops at some stage of the combat. But in the beginning, +while the situation is uncertain, care should be taken not to engage +too large a proportion of the command. On the other hand, there is no +greater error than to employ too few and to sacrifice them by +driblets. + +432. When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire superiority is +essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A heavy fire and a +fire well directed and controlled. Both of these are best obtained +when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while leaving the men +room for the free use of their rifles. + +If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very +difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in +proportion to the front occupied. + +433. In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a +density of one man per yard of front occupied. + +Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to +be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to +deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the +line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased +intervals. + +434. A relatively thin firing line may be employed when merely +covering the movements of other forces; when on the defensive against +poor troops; when the final action to be taken has not yet been +determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is not necessary. + +435. The length of the firing line that the whole force may employ +depends upon the density of the line and the _strength in rear_ +required by the situation. + +Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear. + +In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace +a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging +line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still +have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes +mentioned above. + +436. In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held out +by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his unit, +depending upon the nature of the service expected of the reserve. + +A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little +strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle +requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original +deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men +per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking +in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible. + +437. The density of the whole deployment increases with the size of +the command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity +for reserves. Thus, a battalion acting alone may attack with two men +per yard of front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only +double the front of the one battalion. + +438. By the assignment of divisions or larger units to parts of a line +of battle several miles long, a series of semi-independent battle, or +local combat, districts are created. + +The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several +battle districts is not directly considered in these regulations. The +deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such +districts. + +The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly, +depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle +districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the +line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to +economize troops and to have more at the decisive point. + +439. The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also upon +whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by other +troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing its +reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front may +still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded by +posting the supports or reserve toward that flank. + +Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same +effect upon deployment. + +440. Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the +brigade, battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion +are, when practicable, deployed side by side. + +441. In the deployment, battalions establish the firing line, each +furnishing its own support. + +In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its +strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is +employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about +by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split +up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed +for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action. +When necessary, parts of it reenforce or prolong the firing line. + + + + +ATTACK. + + +442. An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and +properly used. + +To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ +more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as +both sides will probably hold a strong firing line. + +443. With large forces, a direct frontal attack gives the attacker +little opportunity to bring more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy +is unduly extended, a frontal attack may give very decisive results. + +444. Owing to the difficulty of control and the danger of the parts +being defeated in detail, wide turning movements are seldom allowable +except in large forces. + +445. If the attack can be so directed that, while the front is +covered, another fraction of the command strikes a flank more or less +obliquely (an enveloping attack) the advantages gained are a longer +line and more rifles in action; also a converging fire opposed to the +enemy's diverging fire. + +446. An envelopment of both flanks should never be attempted without a +very decided superiority in numbers. + +447. The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally in a +frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The +advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its +preponderance of rifles and its converging fire. + +448. Cooperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is +essential to success. Both should be pushed vigorously and +simultaneously, and ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the +charge; but at the final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes +warrant one in charging while the other supports it with fire. + +The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made +by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves. +The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with +the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The +troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the +proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable +them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and +practical manner. + +The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in +small forces. + + +_DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK._ + +449. Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it +may be necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the +hostile position. + +The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If +the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering +troops must drive them back. + +450. To enable large forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may +sometimes be cheaper and quicker in the end to move well forward and +to deploy at night. In such case the area in which the deployment is +to be made should, if practicable, be occupied by covering troops +before dark. + +The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground +has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it +establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's +main position. (See Night Operations.) + +451. Each unit assigned a task deploys when on its direction line, or +opposite its objective, and when it has no longer sufficient cover for +advancing in close order. In the firing line, intervals of 25 to 50 +yards should be maintained as long as possible between battalions. In +the larger units it may be necessary to indicate on the map the +direction or objective, but to battalion commanders it should be +pointed out on the ground. + +452. The reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand +at the decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or +to that part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are +expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept +intact. + +Supports are considered in paragraphs 225 to 228, inclusive, and 298 +to 302, inclusive. + + +_ADVANCING THE ATTACK._ + +453. The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it +is justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery, +and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range +rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of +cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing +position at the shortest range possible. + +Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered +in paragraphs 212 to 220, inclusive. These and other methods of +crossing such zones should be studied and practiced. + +454. The best protection against loss while advancing is to escape the +enemy's view. + +455. Each battalion finds its own firing position, conforming to the +general advance as long as practicable and taking advantage of the +more advanced position of an adjacent battalion in order to gain +ground. + +The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in +paragraphs 306 to 308, inclusive. + +456. It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to the +attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so as +to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and never +so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as practicable, +advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if any. An +understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should be had, +so as to effect the movement to the best advantage. + +457. In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the firing line or +detachments in front of it should not open fire except in defense or +to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the hostile main +position should not be opened until all or nearly all of the firing +line can join in the fire. + + +_THE FIRE ATTACK._ + +458. At the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire +superiority. This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire for a long +time. The object is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so +that the attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable +place near the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the +advance by rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action +to keep down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the +fraction rushing. + +459. To advance without fire superiority against a determined defense +would result in such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or +to make the apparent success barren of results. + +460. Diminution of the enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in +effectiveness are the surest signs that fire superiority has been +gained and that a part of the firing line can advance. + +461. The men must be impressed with the fact that, having made a +considerable advance under fire and having been checked, it is +suicidal to turn back in daylight. + +If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until +the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops. + +Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have +intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with +difficulty. + +462. Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments vacated by the +firing line should improve them, but they must not be held back or +diverted from their true missions on this account. + +463. Paragraphs 309 to 317, inclusive, deal more in detail with the +conduct of the fire attack. + + +_THE CHARGE._ + +464. Fire superiority beats down the enemy's fire, destroys his +resistance and morale, and enables the attacking troops to close on +him, but an actual or threatened occupation of his position is needed +to drive him out and defeat him. + +The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in +advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide. + +465. The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently +leave before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary +to carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a +short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the +charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to +400 yards. + +The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises +success; otherwise the full advantage of victory will be lost. + +466. The commander of the attacking line should indicate his approval, +or give the order, before the charge is made. Subordinate commanders, +usually battalion commanders, whose troops are ready to charge signal +that fact to the commander. It may be necessary for them to wait until +other battalions or other parts of the line are ready or until the +necessary reserves arrive. + +At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and +reserves rush forward. See paragraphs 318 and 319. + +The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units +participating therein, but, once committed to the assault, battalions +should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the +ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment. + +467. Before ordering the charge the commander should see that enough +troops are on hand to make it a success. Local reserves joining the +firing line in time to participate in the charge give it a strong +impetus. Too dense a mass should be avoided. + +468. The line should be strengthened by prolongation, if practicable, +and remaining troops kept in formation for future use; but rather than +that the attack should fail, the last formed body will be sent in, +unless it is very apparent that it can do no good. + +469. To arrive in the hostile position with a very compact firing line +and a few formed supports is sufficient for a victory, but an +additional force kept well in hand for pursuit is of inestimable +value. + +470. A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided, but +if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there is +any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the +line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The +intention to do so should be signaled to the rear. + +471. Confidence in their ability to use the bayonet gives the +assaulting troops the promise of success. + +472. If the enemy has left the position when the charging troops reach +it, the latter should open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if +he is in sight. It is not advisable for the mixed and disordered units +to follow him, except to advance to a favorable firing position or to +cover the reorganization of others. + +473. The nearest formed bodies accompanying or following the charge +are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of these troops order is +restored in the charging line. If the captured position is part of a +general line or is an advanced post, it should be intrenched and +occupied at once. + +The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of +measures to meet a counterattack. + +474. If the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to +strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop +the rearward movement and will reestablish the firing line in a +covered position as close as possible to the enemy. + +475. If the attack must be abandoned, the rearward movement should +continue with promptness until the troops reach a feature of the +terrain that facilitates the task of checking and reorganizing them. +The point selected should be so far to the rear as to prevent +interference by the enemy before the troops are ready to resist. The +withdrawal of the attacking troops should be covered by the artillery +and by reserves, if any are available. + +See Night Operations. + + +_PURSUIT._ + +476. To reap the full fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be +made. The natural inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge +must be overcome. The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize +than is positively unavoidable. + +477. The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under +control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's +main body or covering detachments wherever found. + +The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the +disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly re-form, and +become a new reserve. + +478. If the captured position is a section of the general line, the +breach should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by +drawing on all reserves in the vicinity. + +479. After the pursuit from the immediate battle field, pursuit by +parallel roads is especially effective where large commands are +concerned. + +480. Artillery and cavalry are very effective in pursuit. + + +_ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS._ + +481. Few modifications enter into the problem of attacking +fortifications. Such as are to be considered relate chiefly to the +greater time and labor of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness +and the use of hand grenades to augment the fire. + +482. If the enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be +advisable to wait and approach the charging point under cover of +darkness. The necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made +before dark. If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops +intrench the advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before +daylight the foreground should be cleared of obstacles. + +483. If the distance is short and other conditions are favorable, the +charge may be made without fire preparation. If made, it should be +launched with spirit and suddenness at the break of day. (See Night +Operations.) + +484. In siege operations troops are usually advanced to the charging +point by sapping. This method, however, presupposes that an early +victory is not necessary or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt +more direct methods. + + +_HOLDING ATTACK._ + +485. The holding attack must be vigorous enough to hold the enemy in +position and must present a front strong enough to conceal the +secondary nature of the attack. + +The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear, +but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that +of a decisive attack. + +486. Supports and reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength +is less if the object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the +object is, in addition, to compel him to use up reserves. + +487. Holding attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks +should be correspondingly strong in rear. + +488. All feint attacks should employ dense firing lines. Their +weakness is in rear and is concealed. + + + + +DEFENSE. + + +_POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS._ + +489. The first requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire +and view to the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800 +yards or more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of +the command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have +lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should +be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his +mission. + +A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found. +The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description. + +490. The natural cover of the position should be fully utilized. In +addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and obstacles. + +The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous +trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be +done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their +construction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been +constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if +conditions are found to be other than expected. + +491. When time and troops are available the preparations include the +necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs, +etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition. + +The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural +cover is not available. + +492. Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile artillery to waste +time and ammunition and to divert its fire. + +493. The location, extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are +matters to be decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be +able to choose ground and properly intrench it. (See Intrenchments.) + +494. In combat exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the +trenches appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by +bayonets, sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers +required to indicate the profile selected, method and time of +construction, garrisons, etc. + + +_DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE._ + +495. The density of the whole deployment depends upon the expected +severity of the action, the character of the enemy, the condition of +the flanks, the field of fire, the terrain, and the available +artificial or natural protection for the troops. + +496. If exposed, the firing line should be as dense in defense as in +attack. If the firing line is well intrenched and has a good field of +fire, it may be made thinner. + +Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the +front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the +offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line. + +497. If it is intended only to delay the enemy, a fairly strong +deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are desired, a +change to the offensive must be contemplated and the corresponding +strength in rear provided. This strength is in the reserve, which +should be as large as the demands of the firing line and supports +permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be as strong as +in the attack, unless the flanks are protected by other means. + +498. Supports are posted as close to the firing line as practicable +and reinforce the latter according to the principles explained in the +attack. When natural cover is not sufficient for the purpose, +communicating and cover trenches are constructed. If time does not +permit their construction, it is better to begin the action with a +very dense firing line and no immediate supports than to have supports +greatly exposed in rear. + +499. The reserve should be posted so as to be entirely free to act as +a whole, according to the developments. The distance from firing line +to reserve is generally greater than in the attack. By reason of such +a location the reserve is best able to meet a hostile enveloping +attack; it has a better position from which to make a counter attack; +it is in a better position to cover a withdrawal and permit an orderly +retreat. + +The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of +the reserve. + +500. When the situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be +held in rear of the flank which is most in danger or offers the best +opportunity for counterattack. Usually the same flank best suits both +purposes. + +501. In exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to +detach a part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This +detachment should be the smallest consistent with its purely +protective mission. + +502. The commander assigns to subordinates the front to be occupied by +them. These, in turn, subdivide the front among their next lower units +in the firing line. + +503. An extended position is so divided into sections that each has, +if practicable, a field of fire naturally made distinct by the +terrain. + +Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist +in the line. + +504. The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the +latter's natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable, +battalions should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or +parts of sections. + +505. Where important dead space lies in front of one section, an +adjoining section should be instructed to cover it with fire when +necessary, or machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose. + +506. Advanced posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion, +should be avoided. + +507. Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position be +great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it +until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a +small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front. + +508. Fire alone can not be depended upon to stop the attack. The +troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if necessary. + +509. If a night attack or close approach by the enemy is expected, +troops in a prepared position should strengthen the outguards and +firing line and construct as numerous and effective obstacles as +possible. Supports and local reserves should move close to the firing +line and should, with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If +practicable, the front should be illuminated, preferably from the +flanks of the section. + +510. Only short range fire is of any value in resisting night attacks. +The bayonet is the chief reliance. (See Night Operations.) + + +_COUNTERATTACK._ + +511. The passive defense should be assumed only when circumstances +force it. Only the offensive wins. + +512. An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable +decision can not be expected without counterattack. + +513. A passive defense in a position whose flanks are not protected by +natural obstacles is generally out of the question. + +514. Where the defense is assumed with a view to making a +counterattack, the troops for the counterattack should be held in +reserve until the time arrives for such attack. The defensive line +should be held by as few troops as possible in order that the force +for the offensive may be as large as possible. + +The force for the counterattack should be held echeloned in rear of +the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed +attack. + +515. The counterattack should be made vigorously and at the proper +time. It will usually be made: + +By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is +in full progress. This is the most effective form of counterattack. + +Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing +the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire. + +Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has +reached the defensive position and is in disorder. + +516. Minor counterattacks are sometimes necessary in order to drive +the enemy from important positions gained by him. + + +_DELAYING ACTION._ + +517. When a position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to +withdraw before becoming closely engaged, the important considerations +are: + +The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should +therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good +field of fire at close range is not necessary. + +The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the +firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as +soon as the position is vacated. + +518. A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally answer +the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks. + +The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal +of the firing line. + +519. Artillery is especially valuable to a delaying force. + + + + +MEETING ENGAGEMENTS. + + +520. Meeting engagements are characterized by the necessity for hasty +reconnaissance, or the almost total absence of reconnaissance; by the +necessity for rapid deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by +the absence of trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions +give further advantages to the offensive. + +521. The whole situation will usually indicate beforehand the proper +general action to be taken on meeting the enemy. + +522. Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness, +initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon. + +523. A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the +commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to +take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious. + +524. The amount of information that the commander is warranted in +awaiting before taking final action depends entirely upon his mission. +One situation may demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid, +partial deployment for attack, but careful and time-consuming +reconnaissance before the attack is launched. + +525. A great advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the +faster. The advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid +deployment, becomes more pronounced with the size of the force. + +526. The first troops to deploy will be able to attack with longer +firing lines and weaker supports than are required in the ordinary +case. But if the enemy succeeds in deploying a strong, defensive line, +the attack must be strengthened accordingly before it is wasted. + +527. If the situation warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to +deploy faster than the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his +deployment, and get information. In any event, they seek to cover the +deployment of their own troops in rear--especially the artillery--and +to seize important ground. + +528. The commander of a long column which meets the enemy should be +with the advance guard to receive information promptly and to +reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the advance guard must hold the +enemy while the commander formulates a plan of action, issues the +necessary orders, and deploys the main body. Meantime, the column +should be closing up, either in mass or to form line of columns, so +that the deployment, when determined upon, may be made more promptly. + +529. The action of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders, +depends upon the situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as +a feint, or to assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the +advance guard, the terrain, the character of the hostile force +encountered, and the mission and intentions of the commander of the +whole. + +530. If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the advance +guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the main +body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him. This +method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution of a +definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are +obtained when the main body is used as a whole. + + + + +WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION. + + +531. The withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only +at a heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a +favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort +must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and +the defeated troops. + +532. Artillery gives especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal. +The long-range fire of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry +assists the withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking +flank positions and using fire action. + +533. If an intact reserve remains it should be placed in a covering +position, preferably on a flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable +the defeated troops to withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire. + +The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from +the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops +quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field +of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own +safe and timely withdrawal. + +534. If the general line is divided, by terrain or by organization, +into two or more parts, the firing line of the part in the least +danger from pursuit should be withdrawn first. A continuous firing +line, whose parts are dependent upon one another for fire support, +should be withdrawn as a whole, retiring by echelon at the beginning +of the withdrawal. Every effort must be made to restore the +organizations, regain control, and form column of march as soon as the +troops are beyond the reach of hostile fire. + +As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the +larger units should be re-formed, so that the command will again be +well in hand. + +535. The commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal, +should go to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself +to the reorganization of his command. + +The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels +of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant +from the battle field and should facilitate the gathering and +protection of the command. + + +SUMMARY. + +536. 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other +valuable results. + +2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid +spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result. + +3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate. + +4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers. + +5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion. + +6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take +advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses. + +7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known. + +8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest +and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action. + +9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the +terrain. + +10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority. + +11. Keep up reconnaissance. + +12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable +opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as +practicable. + +13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth +the cost. + +14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion. + + + + +MISCELLANEOUS. + + +_MACHINE GUNS._ + +537. Machine guns must be considered as weapons of emergency. Their +effectiveness combined with their mobility renders them of great value +at critical, though infrequent, periods of an engagement. + +538. When operating against infantry only, they can be used to a great +extent throughout the combat as circumstances may indicate, but they +are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field artillery and will +promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open. Hence their use in +engagements between large commands must be for short periods and at +times when their great effectiveness will be most valuable. + +539. Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In meeting +engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own +advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have +considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence +them. + +Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action. + +540. They are valuable to a rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous +pursuit or to gain time. + +541. In attack, if fire of position is practicable, they are of great +value. In this case fire should not be opened by the machine guns +until the attack is well advanced. At a critical period in the attack, +such fire, if suddenly and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist +the advancing line. The fire must be as heavy as possible and must be +continued until masked by friendly troops or until the hostile +artillery finds the machine guns. + +542. In the defense, machine guns should be used in the same general +manner as described above for the attack. Concealment and patient +waiting for critical moments and exceptional opportunities are the +special characteristics of the machine gun service in decisive +actions. + +543. As part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If +they are with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they +are well placed, they will often produce decisive results against a +hostile turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a +withdrawal or make a captured position secure. + +544. Machine guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an +attack. They should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not +likely to fall upon the firing line. + +545. A skirmish line can not advance by walking or running when +hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready to fire. +Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops lying on +the ground or crawling. + +546. When opposed by machine guns and without artillery to destroy +them, infantry itself must silence them before it can advance. + +An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection +against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on +each gun in turn and until it has silenced it. + + +_AMMUNITION SUPPLY._ + +547. The method of supply of ammunition to the combat trains is +explained in Field Service Regulations. + +548. The combat train is the immediate reserve supply of the +battalion, and the major is responsible for its proper use. He will +take measures to insure the maintenance of the prescribed allowance at +all times. + +In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march +immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to +enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued. +When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper +rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for +each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it +from the ammunition column. + +549. When refilled, the combat wagons will rejoin their battalions, +or, if the latter be engaged, will join or establish communication +with the regimental reserve. + +550. Company commanders are responsible that the belts of the men in +their companies are kept filled at all times, except when the +ammunition is being expended in action. In the firing line the +ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured whenever +practicable. + +551. Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. +Thirty rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as +a reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. + +552. When necessary to resupply the firing line, ammunition will be +sent forward with reenforcements, generally from the regimental +reserve. + +Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men +sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line. + +553. As soon as possible after an engagement the belts of the men and +the combat wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities. +Ammunition which can not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up +in a convenient place and left under guard. + + +_MOUNTED SCOUTS._ + +554. The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling and +reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring +troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts, +outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc. +Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger +duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these +purposes only. + +555. When infantry is acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed +command has been sent to a distance, the mounted scouts are of special +importance to covering detachments and should be used to make the +reconnaissance which would otherwise fall to cavalry. + +556. In reconnaissance, scouts should be used in preference to other +troops as much as possible. When not needed for mounted duty, they +should be employed for necessary dismounted patrolling. + +557. Battalion staff officers should be specially trained in +patrolling and reconnaissance work in order that they may be available +when a mounted officer's patrol is required. + + +_NIGHT OPERATIONS._ + +558. By employing night operations troops make use of the cover of +darkness to minimize losses from hostile fire or to escape +observation. Night operations may also be necessary for the purpose of +gaining time. Control is difficult and confusion is frequently +unavoidable. + +It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault +from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which +a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and +the assault. + +559. Offensive and defensive night operations should be practiced +frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in the dark +and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and in order to +train officers in the necessary preparation and reconnaissance. + +Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed. + +Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details--e.g., +night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night. + +560. The ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if +practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments +before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering +troops. + +Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit +must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be +exercised to avoid collision between units. + +Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge +should be worn by all. + +561. Preparations must be made with secrecy. When the movement is +started, and not until then, the officers and men should be acquainted +with the general design, the composition of the whole force, and +should be given such additional information as will insure cooperation +and eliminate mistakes. + +During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the +fact that troops are abroad. + +Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be +secured against escape, outcry, or deception. + +Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general, +pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the +bayonet and to use it aggressively. + +562. Long night marches should be made only over well-defined routes. +March discipline must be rigidly enforced. The troops should be +marched in as compact a formation as practicable, with the usual +covering detachments. Advance and rear guard distances should be +greatly reduced. They are shortest when the mission is an offensive +one. The connecting files are numerous. + +563. A night advance made with a view to making an attack by day +usually terminates with the hasty construction of intrenchments in the +dark. Such an advance should be timed so as to allow an hour or more +of darkness for intrenching. + +An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day +should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the +assault is to be made; otherwise the advantage of partial surprise +will be lost and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the threatened +point. + +564. The night attack is ordinarily confined to small forces, or to +minor engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of positions +occupied by covering or advanced detachments. Decisive results are not +often obtained. + +Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or +for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care. + +Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact +formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or +infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction +of the attack. + +A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often +throw a much larger force into disorder. + +565. Reconnaissance should be made to ascertain the position and +strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be traversed. +Officers who are to participate in the attack should conduct this +reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night is especially valuable. +Features that are distinguishable at night should be carefully noted, +and their distances from the enemy, from the starting point of the +troops, and from other important points should be made known. + +Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible. +An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the +surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated. + +566. The time of night at which the attack should be made depends upon +the object sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally +yield the best results if made just before daylight. If the object is +merely to gain an intrenched position for further operations, an +earlier hour is necessary in order that the position gained may be +intrenched under cover of darkness. + +567. The formation for attack must be simple. It should be carefully +effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the enemy. +The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with strong +supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough in rear +to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so desires. +Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded. + +Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops +should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be +prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet. + +In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as +possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust to the +bayonet. + +If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to +repel a counterattack. + +568. On the defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be +made by daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared. + +Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially +valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would +give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious +hindrances at night. + +After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable +and strong patrols should be pushed to the front. + +When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are +filled and the supports moved close to the firing line. + +Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and +necessary they should be used for counterattacks, preferably against a +hostile flank. + +The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This +fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all +supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the +attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet. + +Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards. + +A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the +piece when the front sight is not visible. + +See paragraphs 450, 482, 483, 509, 510. + + +_INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY._ + +569. A cavalry charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in +inferior numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become +panic-stricken, run away, or can not use their rifles. + +570. A charge from the front is easily checked by a well-directed and +sustained fire. + +If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the +supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this +disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by +a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the +firing line execute _platoons right_, the successive firing lines can +ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line +passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if +the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for +succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to +friendly troops in rear. + +571. Men standing are in the best position to meet a charge, but other +considerations may compel them to meet it lying prone. + +572. In a melee, the infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even +chance with the cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is +rifle fire. Any formation is suitable that permits the free use of the +necessary number of rifles. + +Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will +at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will +usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges. + +573. An infantry column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once. +If attacked from the head or rear of the column, and if time is +pressing, it may form a succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by +deploying 50 or 100 yards in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry +and hold it under fire beyond effective pistol range. + +In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst +and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt. + +574. In attacking dismounted cavalry, infantry should close rapidly +and endeavor to prevent remounting. Infantry which adopts this course +will not be seriously checked by delaying cavalry. + +Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led +horses. + + +_INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY._ + +575. A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of +succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short +range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little +effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective +shields. + +Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have +greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer +opportunities and they are limited to fire attack only. + +As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile +artillery. + +576. Artillery attacked in flank by infantry can be severely damaged. +Oblique or flank fire will begin to have decisive effect when +delivered at effective range from a point to one side of the +artillery's line of fire and distant from it by about half the range. +Artillery is better protected on the side of the caisson. + +577. Guns out of ammunition, but otherwise secure against infantry +attack, may be immobilized by fire which will prevent their +withdrawal, or by locating and driving off their limbers. Or they may +be kept out of action by fire which will prevent the receipt of +ammunition. + +578. Artillery when limbered is helpless against infantry fire. If +caught at effective range while coming into action or while limbering, +artillery can be severely punished by infantry fire. + +In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are +the best targets. + + +_ARTILLERY SUPPORTS._ + +579. The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery +against surprise or attack. + +Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be +amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in +its neighborhood. + +580. The detail of a support is not necessary except when the +artillery is separated from the main body or occupies a position in +which its flanks are not protected. + +The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible. + +581. The formation of an artillery support depends upon circumstances. +On the march it may often be necessary to provide advance, flank, and +rear protection. The country must be thoroughly reconnoitered by +patrols within long rifle range. + +582. In action, the formation and location of the support must be such +as to gain and give timely information of the enemy's approach and to +offer actual resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of +the artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery +to suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a +position somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these +conditions. + +583. The support commander is charged only with the protection of the +artillery. The tactical employment of each arm rests with its +commander. The two should cooperate. + + +_INTRENCHMENTS._ + +(Plate V.) + +584. Ordinarily, infantry intrenches itself whenever it is compelled +to halt for a considerable time in the presence of the enemy. + +Infantry charged with a resisting mission should intrench whenever +there is any likelihood that the cover constructed will be of use. + +585. Except in permanent fortifications or in fortifications prepared +long in advance, the infantry plans and constructs the field works +that it will occupy. + +When performing their duties in this connection officers should bear +in mind that profile and construction are simple matters compared with +location and correct tactical use. + +586. Intrenchments enable the commander to hold a position with the +least possible number of men and to prolong his line or increase his +reserve. + +They are constructed with a view to giving cover which will diminish +losses, but they must not be so built or placed as to interfere with +the free use of the rifle. Fire effect is the first consideration. + +587. The trace of a fire trench or of a system of fire trenches +depends upon the ground and the proposed density of the entire firing +line. The trenches are laid out in company lengths, if possible. + +Adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks +and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches +echeloned in rear. (Fig. 6). + +588. To locate the trace, lie on the ground at intervals and select +the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of the +situation. + +A profile should be selected which will permit the fire to sweep the +foreground, require the minimum of labor and time, and permit the best +concealment. No fixed type can be prescribed. The type must be +selected with due regard to the terrain, the enemy, time, tools, +materials, soil, etc. + +589. _Hasty cover._ With the intrenching tool, troops can quickly +throw up a low parapet about 3 feet thick which will furnish +considerable cover against rifle fire, but scarcely any against +shrapnel. Such cover is frequently of value to an attack that is +temporarily unable to continue. In time, and particularly at night, it +may be developed into a deep fire or cover trench. + +590. _Fire trenches_ should be placed and constructed so as to give a +good field of fire and to give the troops protection behind a vertical +wall, preferably with some head or overhead cover. They should be +concealed or inconspicuous in order to avoid artillery fire or to +decrease its accuracy. They should have natural or artificial +communication with their supports, but in establishing the trace this +is a secondary consideration. + +The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has a flat, +concealed parapet. (Fig. 1.) In ordinary soil, and on a basis of two +reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be constructed in about two hours +with intrenching tools. + +This trench affords fair cover for troops subjected to fire, but not +actually firing. When it is probable that time will permit +elaboration, the simple trench should be planned with a view to +developing it ultimately into a more complete form. (Figs. 2 and 3.) +Devices should be added to increase the security of the trench and the +comfort of the men. + +Where the excavated earth is easily removed, a fire trench without +parapet may be the one best suited to the soil and other conditions +affecting the choice of profile. (Fig. 4.) The enemy's infantry, as +well as his artillery, will generally have great difficulty in seeing +this type of trench. + +In very difficult soil, if the time is short, it may be necessary to +dig a wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet. + +[Illustration: Plate V.] + +Head cover, notches, and loop holes are of value to troops when +firing, but many forms weaken and disclose the location of the +parapet. Filled sandbags kept in the trench when the men are not +firing may be thrown on the parapet to form notches or loopholes when +the troops in the trench open fire and concealment of the trench is no +longer necessary or possible. + +By the use of observation stations the maximum rest and security is +afforded the troops. Stations are best located in the angles of +traverses or at the end of the trench. + +591. Where the nature of the position makes it advisable to construct +traverses at regular intervals it is generally best to construct a +section of trench for each squad, with traverses between squads. (Fig. +5.) + +592. _Cover trenches_ are placed as closely as practicable to their +respective fire trenches. Where natural cover is not available, each +fire trench should have artificial cover in rear for its +support--either a cover trench of its own or one in common with an +adjoining fire trench. + +The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Concealment is +indispensable. It is generally concealed by the contour of the ground +or by natural features, but to guard against hostile searching fire +overhead cover is frequently advisable. + +Cover trenches should be made as comfortable as possible. It will +often be advisable to make them extensive enough to provide cooking +and resting facilities for the garrisons of the corresponding fire +trenches. + +593. _Communicating trenches_ are frequently necessary in order to +connect fire trenches with their corresponding cover trenches where +natural, covered communication is impracticable. They are generally +rectangular in profile, deep, and narrow. They are traversed or +zigzagged to escape enfilade. + +Returns or pockets should be provided for use as latrines, storerooms, +dressing stations, passing points for troops, etc. + +Cover from observation while passing through the trench may insure +against loss as effectively as material cover from the enemy's fire. + +_Communicating ways_, naturally or artificially screened from the +enemy's view, sometimes provide sufficient cover for the passage of +troops. + +594. _Dummy trenches_ frequently draw the enemy's attention and fire +and thus protect the true fire trench. + +Any type is suitable which presents to the enemy the appearance of a +true trench imperfectly concealed. + +595. When it is uncertain whether time will permit the completion of +all the work planned, work should proceed with due regard to the order +of importance of the several operations. Ordinarily the order of +importance will be: + +1. Clearing foreground to improve the field of fire and construction +of fire trench. + +2. Head or overhead cover; concealment. + +3. Placing obstacles and recording ranges. + +4. Cover trenches for supports and local reserves. + +5. Communicating trenches. + +6. Widening and deepening of trenches; interior conveniences. + +See paragraph 568. + + +_MINOR WARFARE._ + +596. Minor warfare embraces both regular and irregular operations. + +Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of +trained and organized troops on both sides. + +The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller +units. + +597. Irregular operations consist of actions against unorganized or +partially organized forces, acting in independent or semi-independent +bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude training and are under +nominal and loose leadership and control. They assemble, roam about, +and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by stealth or by force of +superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden dashes or rushes, and +hand-to-hand fighting. + +Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units, +such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed +must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently +the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage. + +In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every +preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the +maximum punishment. + +598. In general, the service of information will be insufficient; +adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable. March and bivouac +formations must be such as to admit of rapid deployment and fire +action in any direction. + +599. In the open country, where surprise is not probable, troops may +be marched in column of squads preceded, within sight, by a squad as +an advance party. + +600. In close country, where surprise is possible, the troops must be +held in a close formation. The use of flank patrols becomes difficult. +Occasionally, an advance party--never less than a squad--may be sent +out. In general, however, such a party accomplishes little, since an +enemy intent on surprise will permit it to pass unmolested and will +fall upon the main body. + +Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow, +the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers +placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal +parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to +face and fire toward either or both flank, the ranks being back to +back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be +deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to +protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to +take some form of a closed back-to-back formation. + +601. The column may often be broken into two or more approximately +equal detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100 +yards. As a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25 +men each. With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be +possible for an enemy to close simultaneously with all of the +detachments, one or more being left unengaged and under control to +support those engaged or to inflict severe punishment upon the enemy +when he is repulsed. + +602. The site for camp or bivouac should be selected with special +reference to economical and effective protection against surprise. +Double sentinels are posted on the avenues of approach and the troops +sleep in readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should +be instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack +at night. + +603. Night operations are frequently advisable. With the small forces +employed, control is not difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide +proper camp protection, and they may frequently be surprised and +severely punished by a properly conducted night march and attack. + + +_PATROLS._ + +604. The following paragraphs on patrols are placed here for +convenience. They relate in particular to the conduct of the patrol +and its leader, and apply to patrols employed in covering detachments +as well as in combat reconnaissance. + +605. A patrol is a detachment sent out from a command to gain +information of the country or of the enemy, or to prevent the enemy +from gaining information. In special cases patrols may be given +missions other than these. + +606. The commander must have clearly in mind the purpose for which the +patrol is to be used in order that he may determine its proper +strength, select its leader, and give the latter proper instructions. + +In general, a patrol should be sent out for one definite purpose only. + +607. The strength of a patrol varies from two or three men to a +company. It should be strong enough to accomplish its purpose, and no +stronger. + +If the purpose is to gain information only, a small patrol is better +than a large one. The former conceals itself more readily and moves +less conspicuously. For observing from some point in plain view of the +command or for visiting or reconnoitering between outguards two men +are sufficient. + +If messages are to be sent back, the patrol must be strong enough to +furnish the probable number of messengers without reducing the patrol +to less than two men. If hostile patrols are likely to be met and must +be driven off, the patrol must be strong. + +In friendly territory, a weaker patrol may be used than would be used +for the corresponding purpose in hostile territory. + +608. The character of the leader selected for the patrol depends upon +the importance of the work in hand. + +For patrolling between the groups or along the lines of an outpost, or +for the simpler patrols sent out from a covering detachment, the +average soldier will be a competent leader. + +609. For a patrol sent out to gain information, or for a distant +patrol sent out from a covering detachment, the leader must be +specially selected. He must be able to cover large areas with few men; +he must be able to estimate the strength of hostile forces, to report +intelligently as to their dispositions, to read indications, and to +judge as to the importance of the information gained. He must possess +endurance, courage, and good judgment. + +His instructions should be full and clear. He must be made to +understand exactly what is required of him, where to go and when to +return. He should be given such information of the enemy and country +as may be of value to him. He should be informed as to the general +location of his own forces, particularly of those with whom he may +come in contact. If possible, he should be given a map of the country +he is to traverse, and in many cases his route may be specified. + +Besides his arms and ammunition, the patrol leader should have a +compass, a watch, a pencil, a note book, and, when practicable, field +message blanks and a map of the country. + +The patrol leader assembles the men detailed for the patrol. He +inspects their arms and ammunition and satisfies himself that they are +in suitable condition for the duty. He sees that none has any papers, +maps, etc., that would be of value to the enemy if captured. He sees +that their accouterments do not glisten or rattle when they move. He +then repeats his instructions to the patrol and assures himself that +every man understands them. He explains the signals to be used and +satisfies himself that they are understood. He designates a man to +take his place should he be disabled. + +610. The formation and movements of the patrol must be regulated so as +to render probable the escape of at least one man should the patrol +encounter a superior force. The formation will depend upon the nature +of the ground traversed and the cover afforded. The leader must adopt +the formation and measures best suited to the accomplishment of his +object. + +In general, it should have the formation of a main body with advance, +rear, and flank guards, though each be represented only by a single +man. + +611. The distances separating the members of the patrol vary according +to the ground. If too close together, they see no more than one man; +if too widely separated they are likely to be lost to the control of +the leader. + +With a patrol of four or five men the distances may vary from 25 to 50 +yards; with a larger patrol they may be as great as 100 yards. + +At times a column of files, separated by the distances prescribed, is +a satisfactory formation. + +612. The country must be carefully observed as the patrol advances. In +passing over a hill, the country beyond should first be observed by +one man; houses, inclosures, etc., should be approached in a similar +manner or avoided entirely; woods should generally be reconnoitered in +a thin skirmish line. + +613. The strength and composition of hostile troops must be observed. +If they can not be counted, their strength may be estimated by the +length of time a column consumes in passing a given point, or by the +area covered if in camp. + +Patrol leaders should know, if practicable, the uniforms, guidons, +etc., of the enemy, as it will assist in determining the class of +troops seen when no other means for doing so are available. + +Insignia from the enemy's uniforms, picked up by patrols, often convey +valuable information by indicating what troops are in the vicinity. + +614. Patrols avoid fighting, except in self-defense or in order to +prevent the enemy's patrols from gaining valuable information, or when +necessary in order to accomplish their mission. In such cases, a +patrol should fight resolutely even though inferior in numbers. + +615. Information gained by patrols is generally of no value unless +received in time to be of use to the commander. Patrol leaders must +therefore send back information of importance as soon as it is gained +unless the patrol itself is to return at once. + +616. If written, messages should state the place, date, hour, and +minute of their dispatch. The information contained in them should be +clearly and concisely expressed. They should be signed by the patrol +leader. + +The authorized message book should be used and the form therein +adhered to. + +617. If the message be an oral one, the patrol leader should require +the messenger to repeat it before starting back. In general, an oral +message should cover but one point. Except when there is little chance +of error in transmission, messages should be written. + +618. When in friendly territory and not very far from friendly troops, +one messenger is sufficient unless the message is very important. In +hostile territory, either two men should go together or the message +should be sent in duplicate by different routes. + +619. Whether the information gained is of sufficient importance to be +reported at once or may await the return of the patrol is a question +which must be decided in each case. In case of reasonable doubt, it is +generally better to send the report promptly. If the patrol leader has +received proper instructions before starting out and has the requisite +ability to lead a patrol, he can generally decide such questions +satisfactorily as they arise. + +620. Infantry patrols are generally used for work within 2 miles of +supporting troops, but cases arise where they must go to greater +distances. + +621. Patrols composed of mounted scouts are conducted like cavalry +patrols and should be trained in accordance with the Cavalry Drill +Regulations. + +For distant patrolling, a mounted patrol under an officer should be +used. + +622. For controlling the movements of the patrol, the leader should, +when necessary, make use of the arm signals prescribed in these +regulations. + +On account of the short distances separating them, ordinary +communication between members of the patrol is best effected quietly +by word of mouth. + +When a member of a patrol is sent to a distant point, communication +may be effected by means of simple, prearranged signals. + +When practicable, the patrol leader may communicate with the main body +by means of visual signaling. + + + + +PART III.--MARCHES AND CAMPS. + + + + +MARCHES. + + +_TRAINING AND DISCIPLINE._ + +623. Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops in +campaign and is one of the heaviest causes of loss. This loss may be +materially reduced by proper training and by the proper conduct of the +march. + +624. The training of infantry should consist of systematic physical +exercises to develop the general physique and of actual marching to +accustom men to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment. + +Before mobilization troops should be kept in good physical condition +and so practiced as to teach them thoroughly the principles of +marching. At the first opportunity after mobilization the men should +be hardened to cover long distances without loss. + +625. With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the men to +this work must be gradual. Immediately after being mustered into the +service the physical exercises and marching should be begun. +Ten-minute periods of vigorous setting-up exercises should be given +three times a day to loosen and develop the muscles. One march should +be made each day, with full equipment, beginning with a distance of 2 +or 3 miles and increasing the distance daily as the troops become +hardened, until a full day's march under full equipment may be made +without exhaustion. + +626. A long march should not be made with untrained troops. If a long +distance must be covered in a few days, the first march should be +short, the length being increased each succeeding day. + +627. Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the +care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too short. Sores and +blisters on the feet should be promptly dressed during halts. At the +end of the march feet should be bathed and dressed; the socks and, if +practicable, the shoes should be changed. + +628. The drinking of water on the march should be avoided. The thirst +should be thoroughly quenched before starting on the march and after +arrival in camp. On the march the use of water should, in general, be +confined to gargling the mouth and throat or to an occasional small +drink at most. + +629. Except for urgent reasons, marches should not begin before an +hour after daylight, but if the distance to be covered necessitates +either breaking camp before daylight or making camp after dark, it is +better to do the former. + +Night marching should be avoided when possible. + +630. A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first half or +three-quarters of an hour of marching; thereafter a halt of 10 minutes +is made in each hour. The number and length of halts may be varied, +according to the weather, the condition of the roads, and the +equipment carried by the men. When the day's march is long a halt of +an hour should be made at noon and the men allowed to eat. + +631. The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading +company of each regiment, or, if the battalions be separated by +greater than normal distances, by the commander of the leading company +of each battalion. He should maintain a uniform rate, uninfluenced by +the movements of troops or mounted men in front of him. + +The position of companies in the battalion and of battalions in the +regiment is ordinarily changed daily so that each in turn leads. + +632. The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the +amount of straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at +the end of the march. + +An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue +elongation and straggling. + +When necessary for a man to fall out on account of sickness, he should +be given a permit to do so. This is presented to the surgeon, who will +admit him to the ambulance, have him wait for the trains, or follow +and rejoin his company at the first halt. + +633. Special attention should be paid to the rate of march. It is +greater for trained than for untrained troops; for small commands than +for large ones; for lightly burdened than for heavily burdened +troops. It is greater during cool than during hot weather. With +trained troops, in commands of a regiment or less, marching over +average roads, the rate should be from 2-3/4 to 3 miles per hour. With +larger commands carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to +2-1/2 miles per hour. + +634. The marching capacity of trained infantry in small commands is +from 20 to 25 miles per day. This distance will decrease as the size +of the command increases. For a complete division the distance can +seldom exceed 12-1/2 miles per day unless the division camps in +column. + +635. In large commands the marching capacity of troops is greatly +reduced by faulty march orders and poor march discipline. + +The march order should contain such instructions as will enable the +troops to take their proper places in column promptly. Delay or +confusion in doing so should be investigated. On the other hand, +organization commanders should be required to time their movements so +that the troops will not be formed sooner than necessary. + +The halts and starts of the units of a column should be regulated by +the watch and be simultaneous. + +Closing up during a halt, or changing gait to gain or lose distance +should be prohibited. + +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 12._) + + +_PROTECTION OF THE MARCH._ + +_General Considerations._ + +636. A column on the march in the vicinity of the enemy is covered by +detachments called "advance guards," "rear guards," or "flank guards." +The object of these covering detachments is to facilitate the advance +of the main body and to protect it from surprise or observation. + +They facilitate the advance of the main body by promptly driving off +small bodies of the enemy who seek to harass or delay it; by removing +obstacles from the line of advance, by repairing roads, bridges, etc., +thus enabling the main body to advance uninterruptedly in convenient +marching formations. + +They protect the main body by preventing the enemy from firing into it +when in close formation; by holding the enemy and enabling the main +body to deploy before coming under effective fire; by preventing its +size and conditions from being observed by the enemy; and, in +retreat, by gaining time for it to make its escape or to reorganize +its forces. + +637. Tactical units should not be broken in making details for +covering detachments. + +638. The march order of the whole command should explain the +situation, and, among other things, detail the commander and troops +for each covering detachment. It should specify the route to be taken +and the distance to be maintained between the main body and its +covering detachments. It should order such reconnaissance as the +commander specially desires to have made. + +The order of the commander of a covering detachment should clearly +explain the situation to subordinates, assign the troops to the +subdivisions, prescribe their distances, and order such special +reconnaissance as may be deemed necessary in the beginning. + +An advance or flank guard commander marches well to the front and, +from time to time, orders such additional reconnaissance or makes such +changes in his dispositions as the circumstances of the case demand. + + +_Advance Guards._ + +639. An _advance guard_ is a detachment of the main body which +precedes and covers it on the march. + +640. The advance guard commander is responsible for its formation and +conduct. He should bear in mind that its purpose is to facilitate and +protect the march of the main body. Its own security must be effected +by proper dispositions and reconnaissance, not by timid or cautious +advance. It must advance at normal gait and search aggressively for +information of the enemy. Its action when the enemy attempts to block +it with a large force depends upon the situation and plans of the +commander of the troops. + +641. The strength of the advance guard varies from one-twentieth to +one-third of the main body, depending upon the size of the main body +and the service expected of the advance guard. + +642. The formation of the advance guard must be such that the enemy +will be met first by a patrol, then in turn by one or more larger +detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next in rear +has time to deploy before coming under effective fire. + +643. Generally an advance guard consisting of a battalion or more is +divided primarily into the _reserve_ and the _support_. When the +advance guard consists of less than a battalion, the reserve is +generally omitted. + +644. In an advance guard consisting of two battalions or less, the +reserve and support, if both are used, are approximately equal; in +larger advance guards, the reserve is approximately two-thirds of the +whole detachment. + +In an advance guard consisting of one battalion, the machine guns, if +any, form part of the reserve. In an advance guard consisting of two +or more battalions, the machine guns form part of the support. + +645. The _support_ sends forward an _advance party_. The _advance +party_, in turn, sends a patrol, called a _point_, still farther to +the front. Patrols are sent out to the flanks when necessary. When the +distance between parts of the advance guard or the nature of the +country is such as to make direct communication difficult, connecting +files march between the subdivisions to keep up communication. Each +element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its +front. + +646. A battalion acting as an advance guard should be formed about as +follows: The _reserve_, two companies; the _support_, two companies; +the _advance party_, three to eight squads (about a half company), +depending upon the strength of the companies and the reconnaissance to +be made; the _point_, a noncommissioned officer and three or four men. +Or the reserve may be omitted. In such case the advance party will +consist of one company preceded by a strong point. The remaining +companies form the support. + +647. The distances separating the parts of an advance guard vary +according to the mission of the whole force, the size of the advance +guard, the proximity and character of the enemy, the nature of the +country, etc. They increase as the strength of the main body +increases; they are less when operating in rolling, broken country +than in open country; when in pursuit of a defeated enemy than against +an aggressive foe; when operating against cavalry than when against +infantry. + +If there be a mounted point, it should precede the dismounted point by +250 to 600 yards. The advance party may be stronger when there is a +mounted point in front. The infantry maintains its gait without +reference to the mounted point, the latter regulating its march on the +former, (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +648. To afford protection to an infantry column, the country must be +observed on each side of the road as far as the terrain affords +positions for effective rifle fire upon the column. If the country +that it is necessary to observe be open to view from the road, +_reconnaissance_ is not necessary. + +649. The advance guard is responsible for the necessary reconnaissance +of the country on both sides of the line of march. + +Special reconnaissance may be directed by the commander of the troops, +or cavalry may be reconnoitering at considerable distances to the +front and flanks, but this does not relieve the advance guard from the +duty of local reconnaissance. + +650. This reconnaissance is effected by patrols sent out by the +leading subdivisions of the advance guard. In a large advance guard +the support commander orders the necessary reconnaissance. + +Patrols should be sent to the flanks when necessary to reconnoiter a +specified locality and should rejoin the column and their proper +subdivision as soon as practicable. When the advance party is strong +enough, the patrols should be sent out from it. When depleted by the +patrols sent out, the advance party should be reenforced during a halt +by men sent forward from the support. If it be impracticable to send +patrols from the advance party, they will be sent from the support. + +Where the country is generally open to view, but localities in it +might conceal an enemy of some size, reconnaissance is necessary. +Where the road is exposed to fire and the view is restricted, a patrol +should be sent to examine the country in the direction from which +danger threatens. The object may be accomplished by sending patrols to +observe from prominent points. When the ground permits and the +necessity exists, patrols may be sent to march abreast of the column +at distances which permit them to see important features not visible +from the road. + +Mounted scouts or cavalry, when available, should be used for flank +patrols. + +651. Cases may arise where the best means of covering the head and +flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers extending for +several hundred yards to both sides of the road, and deployed at +intervals of from 10 to 50 yards. A column may thus protect itself +when passing through country covered with high corn or similar +vegetation. In such case, the vegetation forms a natural protection +from rifle fire beyond very short ranges. + +652. Fixed rules for the strength, formation, or conduct of advance +guards can not be given. Each case must be treated to meet conditions +as they exist. That solution is generally the best which, with the +fewest men and unbroken units, amply protects the column and +facilitates the advance. + + +_Rear Guards._ + +653. A _rear guard_ is a detachment detailed to protect the main body +from attack in rear. In a retreat, it checks pursuit and enables the +main body to increase the distance between it and the enemy and to +re-form if disorganized. + +The general formation is that of an advance guard reversed. + +654. Its commander should take advantage of every favorable +opportunity to delay the pursuers by obstructing the road or by taking +up specially favorable positions from which to force the enemy to +deploy. In this latter case care must be taken not to become so +closely engaged as to render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The +position taken should be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal +and ability to bring the enemy under fire at long range. + +655. In large commands artillery and cavalry form a very important +part of the rear guard. + + +_Flank Guards._ + +656. A _flank guard_ is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a +column marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be +placed in position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as +to cover the passage. + +657. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in check long +enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the advance guard, to +enable the main body to deploy. + +Like all other detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary, +and should not be detailed except when its protection is required. + +658. When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance +from the main body should not exceed a mile and a half. Practicable +communication must exist between it and the main body. + +659. The flank guard is marched as a separate command; that is, with +advance or rear guards or both, as circumstances demand, and with +patrolling on the exposed flank. + +660. At times it may be necessary for an advance-guard commander to +send out large reconnoitering parties which temporarily assume the +character and duties of a flank guard. Such parties should be given +specific orders as to when and where they are to rejoin the column. + + + + +CAMPS. + + +_SANITATION._ + +661. If the area of the available ground is sufficient and suitable, +the camp of the battalion or regiment should conform to the plates +published in the Field Service Regulations. Under similar favorable +conditions, the brigade may camp in column or in line of columns. In +the latter formation the interval between regiments should be about 50 +yards. When the camp site has a restricted area, intervals and +distances are reduced. + +Under service conditions, camp sites that will permit the encampment +of regiments and brigades as above indicated will not often be +available and regularity must be sacrificed. + +662. In large commands the halt order should assign camp sites to the +next smaller commands, and the commanders of the latter should locate +their respective commands to the best advantage on the area assigned +them. + + +_The Selection of Camp Sites._ + +663. In campaign, tactical necessity may leave little choice in the +selection of camp sites, but under any conditions the requirements of +sanitation should be given every consideration consistent with the +tactical situation. + +664. Great care should be exercised in selecting sites. In general, +the following principles govern: + +The site should be convenient to an abundant supply of pure water. + +Good roads should lead to the camp. Interior communication throughout +the camp should be easy. A camp near a main road is undesirable on +account of dust and noise. + +Wood, grass, forage, and supplies should be at hand or easily +obtainable. + +The ground should accommodate the command without crowding and without +compelling the troops of one unit to pass through the camp of another. + +The site should be sufficiently high and rolling to drain off storm +water readily, and, if the season be hot, to catch the breeze. In cold +weather it should preferably have a southern exposure, with woods to +the north to break the cold winds. In warm weather an eastern +exposure, with the site moderately shaded by trees, is desirable. + +The site should be dry. For this reason porous soil, covered with +stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or gravelly subsoil, is best. A +site on clay soil, or where the ground water approaches the surface, +is damp, cold, and unhealthful. + +Alluvial soils, marshy ground, and ground near the base of hills, or +near thick woods or dense vegetation, are undesirable as camp sites on +account of dampness. Ravines and depressions are likely to be unduly +warm and to have insufficient or undesirable air currents. + +Proximity to marshes or stagnant water is undesirable on account of +the dampness, mosquitoes, and the diseases which the latter transmit. +The high banks of lakes or large streams often make desirable camp +sites. + +Dry beds of streams should be avoided; they are subject to sudden +freshet. + +665. The occupation of old camp sites is dangerous, since these are +often permeated by elements of disease which persist for considerable +periods. Camp sites must be changed promptly when there is evidence of +soil pollution or when epidemic disease threatens, but the need for +frequent changes on this account may be a reflection on the sanitary +administration of the camp. + +A change of camp site is often desirable in order to secure a change +of surroundings and to abandon areas which have become dusty and cut +up. + + +_Water Supply._ + +666. Immediately on making camp a guard should be placed over the +water supply. If the water be obtained from a stream, places should be +designated for drawing water (1) for drinking and cooking, (2) for +watering animals, (3) for bathing and washing clothing. The first +named should be drawn farthest up the stream; the others, in the order +named, downstream. + +If the stream be small, the water supply may be increased by building +a dam. Small springs may be dug out and each lined with a gabion, or a +barrel or box with both ends removed, or with stones, the space +between the lining and the earth being filled with puddled clay. A rim +of clay should be built to keep out surface drainage. The same method +may be used near swamps, streams, or lakes to increase or clarify the +water supply. + +667. Water that is not known to be pure should be boiled 20 minutes; +it should then be cooled and aerated by being poured repeatedly from +one clean container to another, or it may be purified by approved +apparatus supplied for the purpose. + +668. Arrangements should be made for men to draw water from the +authorized receptacles by means of a spigot or other similar +arrangement. The dipping of water from the receptacles, or the use of +a common drinking cup, should be prohibited. + + +_Kitchens._ + +669. Camp kettles can be hung on a support consisting of a green pole +lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same character. + +A narrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under the pole, +not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel. A still +greater economy of fuel can be effected by digging a similar trench in +the direction of the wind and slightly narrower than the diameter of +the kettles. The kettles are then placed on the trench and the space +between the kettles filled in with stones, clay, etc., leaving the +flue running beneath the kettles. The draft can be improved by +building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at the leeward end of the +flue. + +Four such trenches radiating from a common central chimney will give +one flue for use whatever may be the direction of the wind. + +A slight slope of the flue, from the chimney down, provides for +drainage and improves the draft. + +670. The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of +stone and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is +available, an empty barrel, with one head out, is laid on its side, +covered with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a +layer of dry earth equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay +above the closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a +hot fire. This leaves a baked clay covering for the oven. + +A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brushwood, +supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered and +burnt out as in the case of the barrel. + +When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated therein and +used at once. + +To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and ends. + +671. Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must +be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men. +Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean. + +672. Solid refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen +fire or in an improvised crematory. + +673. In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the +kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dug +near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or +poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used +for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies. +Pits of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully. +All pits should be filled with earth before marching. + + +_Disposal of Excreta._ + +674. Immediately on arriving in camp sinks should be dug. This is a +matter of fundamental sanitary importance, since the most serious +epidemics of camp diseases are spread from human excreta. + +One sink is usually provided for each company and one for the officers +of each battalion. Those for the men are invariably located on the +side of camp opposite the kitchens. All sinks should be so placed that +they can not pollute the water supply or camp site as a result of +drainage or overflow. To insure this, their location and their +distance from camp may be varied. + +When camp is made for a single night, shallow trenches, 12 inches deep +and 15 to 18 inches wide, which the men may straddle, will suffice. + +In more permanent camps, the trenches should be about 2 feet wide, 6 +feet deep, and 15 feet long. They should be provided with seats and +back rests made of poles, and should be screened by brush or old tent +flys. + +675. In cold weather the contents of sinks should be covered once +daily with quicklime, ashes, or dry earth. When filled to within 2 +feet of the top, sinks should be discontinued and filled in. + +Open pits are dangerous during the fly season. However, the danger may +be greatly reduced by covering the excreta with earth or by a thorough +daily burning of the entire area of the trench. Combustible sweepings +or straw, saturated with oil, may be used for this purpose. + +In fly season, trenches may be closed with seats covered down to the +ground with muslin and supplied with self-closing lids. Urinal +troughs, made of muslin and coated with oil or paint, should discharge +into the trenches. + +676. In permanent camps special sanitary facilities for the disposal +of excreta will ordinarily be provided. + +If necessary, urinal tubs may be placed in the company streets at +night and removed at reveille. Their location should be plainly marked +and thoroughly and frequently disinfected. + +677. When troops bivouac for the night the necessity for extensive +sanitary precautions is not great; however, shallow sink trenches +should be dug to prevent general pollution of the vicinity. If the +cooking be collective, shallow kitchen sinks should be dug. If the +cooking be individual, the men should be required to build their fires +on the leeward flank of the camp or bivouac. + +Before marching, all trenches should be filled in. + + +_PROTECTION OF CAMP OR BIVOUAC._ + +_General Considerations._ + +678. The outpost is a covering detachment detailed to secure the camp +or bivouac against surprise and to prevent an attack upon it before +the troops can prepare to resist. + +679. The size and disposition of the outpost will depend upon many +circumstances, such as the size of the whole command, the proximity of +the enemy and the situation with respect to him, the nature of the +terrain, etc. + +A suitable strength may vary from a very small fraction to one-third +of the whole force. For a single company in bivouac a few sentinels +and patrols will suffice; for a large command a more elaborate outpost +system must be provided. It should be no stronger than is consistent +with reasonable security. + +The most economical protection is furnished by keeping close contact +with the enemy by means of outpost patrols, in conjunction with +resisting detachments on the avenues of approach. + +The outpost should be composed of complete organizations. + +680. In a brigade or smaller force on the march toward the enemy, the +outpost is generally formed from the advance guard, and is relieved +the following day when the new advance guard crosses the line of +outguards. In a retreat, the detail for outpost duty is generally made +from the main body. The new outpost becomes the rear guard the +following day. + +681. When, as in large forces, an advance and rear guard performs such +duty for several days, the outpost, during this period, is furnished +by the advance or rear guards. + +When the command is small and stationary for several days, the outpost +is relieved daily. In large commands, the outpost will, as a rule, be +relieved at intervals of several days. + +682. The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost should +generally be prepared for defense, but conditions may render this +unnecessary. + +Troops on outpost keep concealed as much as is consistent with the +proper performance of their duties; especially do they avoid appearing +on the sky line. + +Outpost troops do not render honors. + + +_Distribution of Outpost Troops._ + +683. The outpost will generally be divided into three parts. These, in +order from the main body, are the _reserve_, the line of _supports_, +and the line of _outguards_. + +The distances separating these parts, and their distance from the main +body, will depend upon the object sought, the nature of the terrain, +and the size of the command. There can be no uniformity in the +distance between supports and reserve, nor between outguards and +supports, even in the same outpost. The avenues of approach and the +important features of the terrain will largely control their exact +positions. + +The outpost of a small force should ordinarily hold the enemy beyond +effective rifle range of the main body until the latter can deploy. +For the same purpose the outpost of a large force should hold the +enemy beyond artillery range. + +684. The _reserve_ constitutes the main body of the outpost and is +held at some central point from which it can readily _support the +troops in front_ or _hold a rallying position_ on which they may +retire. The reserve may be omitted when the outpost consists of less +than two companies. + +The reserve may comprise one-fourth to two-thirds of the strength of +the outpost. + +685. The _supports_ constitute a line of _supporting_ and _resisting_ +detachments, varying in size from a half company to a battalion. They +furnish the line of _outguards_. + +The supports are numbered consecutively from right to left. They are +placed at the more important points on the outpost line, usually in +the line on which resistance is to be made in case of attack. + +686. As a general rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the +location of supports, and a support will generally be placed on or +near a road. The section which it is to cover should be clearly +defined by means of tangible lines on the ground and should be such +that the support is centrally located therein. + +687. The _outguards_ constitute the line of small detachments farthest +to the front and nearest to the enemy. For convenience they are +classified as _pickets_, _sentry squads_, and _cossack posts_. They +are numbered consecutively from right to left in each support. + +688. A _picket_ is a group consisting of two or more squads, +ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of +outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or +more sentinels, double sentinels, sentry squads, or cossack posts for +_observation_. + +Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of +outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the +number of small groups required to observe properly its sector. + +689. A _sentry squad_ is a squad posted in _observation_ at an +indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the +remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels. +In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol. + +690. A _cossack post_ consists of four men. It is an _observation_ +group similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel. + +691. At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the +outguards or their sentinels in a position different from that which +they occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be +carefully studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a +change in the position of the outguard will be exceptional. + +692. _Sentinels_ are generally used singly in daytime, but at night +double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels furnished +by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those +furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. + +Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the body to +which he belongs. + +693. Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in +each outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets +are counted as sentinel posts. + +694. Instead of using outguards along the entire front of observation, +part of this front may be covered by _patrols_ only. These should be +used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed by the +enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to attempt +a crossing after dark. + +In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with if the +country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, patrols +should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground in +that direction is exceptionally open. + +695. Patrols or sentinels must be the first troops which the enemy +meets, and each body in rear must have time to prepare for the blow. +These bodies cause as much delay as possible without sacrificing +themselves, and gradually retire to the line where the outpost is to +make its resistance. + +696. Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts of +the outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups +are mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained +throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are +provided with wire communication. + +697. In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost commander may +detail from the reserve one or more _detached posts_ to cover roads or +areas not in the general line assigned to the supports. + +In like manner the commander of the whole force may order _detached +posts_ to be sent from the main body to cover important roads or +localities not included in the outpost line. + +The number and strength of detached posts are reduced to the absolute +needs of the situation. + + +_Establishing the Outpost._ + +698. The outpost is posted as quickly as possible so that the troops +can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops are able +to assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the _march +outpost_, is furnished by the nearest available troops. + +699. The halt order of the commander, besides giving the necessary +information and assigning camp sites to the parts of the command, +details the troops to constitute the outpost, assigns a commander +therefor, designates the general line to be occupied, and, when +practicable, points out the position to be held in case of attack. + +700. The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order, should issue +the outpost order with the least practicable delay. In large commands +it may often be necessary to give the order from the map, but usually +the outpost commander will have to make some preliminary +reconnaissance, unless he has an accurate and detailed map. + +The order gives such available information of the situation as is +necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates; +designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their +location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary +detached posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be +made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; disposes of +the train if same is ordered to join the outpost; and informs +subordinates where information will be sent. + +701. Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give +verbal orders to his support commanders from some locality which +overlooks the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected +that the support commanders may join their commands and conduct them +to their positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops. +The reserve commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the +same time as the support commanders. Subordinates to whom he gives +orders separately should be informed of the location of other parts of +the outpost. + +In large outposts, written orders are frequently most convenient. + +After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander inspects the +outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and sends his +superior a report of his dispositions. + +702. The _reserve_ is marched to its post by its commander, who then +sends out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in +camp or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted. +Connection must be maintained with the main body, the supports and +nearby detached posts. + +703. The _supports_ march to their posts, using the necessary covering +detachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support +commander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates, +or to the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops +for the different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector +each is to cover. It should provide the necessary sentinels at the +post of the support, the patrols to be sent therefrom, and should +arrange for the necessary intrenching. Connection should be maintained +with adjoining supports and with the outguards furnished by the +support. + +704. In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover +his sector in such manner that the enemy can not reach, in dangerous +numbers and unobserved, the position of the support or pass by it +within the sector intrusted to the support. On the other hand, he must +economize men on observation and patrol duty, for these duties are +unusually fatiguing. He must practice the greatest economy of men +consistent with the requirements of practical security. + +705. As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander +carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and +reports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling +ordered, to the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by +means of a sketch. + +706. Each _outguard_ is marched by its commander to its assigned +station, and, especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the +necessary patrolling to prevent surprise. + +Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation to +his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel, and, if possible, +for each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols, +a picket must have a sentinel at its post. + +The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them the +principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their +names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, and +of adjoining parts of the outpost. + +He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders as +to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be +covered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark. + +707. Every picket should maintain connection by patrols with outguards +on its right and left. Each commander will take precaution to conceal +his outguard and will generally strengthen his position by +intrenching. + + + + +PART IV.--CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS. + + + + +CEREMONIES. + + +_General Rules for Ceremonies._ + +708. The order in which the troops of the various arms are arranged +for ceremonies is prescribed by Army Regulations. + +When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the +battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and +from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective +commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the +head. + +The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the +front. + +709. At the command _present arms_, given by the colonel, the +lieutenant colonel and the colonel's staff salute; the major's staff +salute at the major's command. Each staff returns to the carry or +order when the command _order arms_ is given by its chief. + +710. At the _assembly_ for a ceremony companies are formed on their +own parades and informally inspected. + +At _adjutant's call_, except for ceremonies involving a single +battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are +received, and the battalion presented to the major. At the second +sounding of _adjutant's call_ the regiment is formed. + + +_REVIEWS._ + +_General Rules._ + +711. The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where the +column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing will +be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer. + +The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the +line, is indicated by a marker. + +Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages +invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves on his +left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the +left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others +who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of +his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to +escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper +positions. + +712. While riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct +his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing +officer, or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him; +in either case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing +officer. If the reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff, +the staff officers of the commander place themselves on the right of +the staff of the reviewing officer. + +The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the +color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing +officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in +front of it. + +The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of +the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not +salute. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 4 and 6._) + +713. In passing in review, each staff salutes with its commander. +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 4._) + +714. After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer of +the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the +reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff +accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's +staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has +passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the +troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff +accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The +commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the +only ones who turn out of the column. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 10._) + +715. If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the +commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after +passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In +such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining +his command, is made with the hand before remounting. + +716. When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, +each regimental color salutes at the command _present arms_, given or +repeated by the major of the battalion with which it is posted; and +again in passing in review. + +717. The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer is +passing in front of and in rear of the organization. + +Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out +of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to +play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in +rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to +play as soon as the preceding band has ceased. + +While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time, +and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing +officer. + +718. If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, +the band plays the prescribed _national air_ or the field music sounds +_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_ when arms are +presented. When passing in review at the moment the regimental color +salutes, the musicians halted in front of the reviewing officer, sound +_to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_. (_C.I.D.R., No. +6._) + +719. The formation for review may be modified to suit the ground, and +the _present arms_ and the ride around the line by the reviewing +officer may be dispensed with. + +720. If the post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the +column, the troops march in review with the guide left; the commanding +officer and his staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post +as prescribed above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in +saluting, the captains give the command: 1. _Eyes_, 2. _LEFT_. + +721. Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops pass in +review in quick time only. + +722. In reviews of brigades or larger commands, each battalion, after +the rear has passed the reviewing officer 50 paces, takes the double +time for 100 yards in order not to interfere with the march of the +column in rear; if necessary, it then turns out of the column and +returns to camp by the most practicable route; the leading battalion +of each regiment is followed by the other units of the regiment. + +723. In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may cause +his regiment to stand _at ease_, _rest_, or _stack arms_ and _fall +out_ and _resume attention_, so as not to interfere with the ceremony. + +724. When an organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior +in rank to the commanding officer, the commanding officer receives +the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his +left. + + +_Battalion Review._ + +725. The battalion having been formed in line, the major faces to the +front; the reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and +halts; the major turns about and commands: 1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_, +and again turns about and salutes. + +The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about, +brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front. + +The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the +latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around +the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the +right of the band, passes in front of the captains to the left of the +line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and +the band. + +On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts, +and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves directly to +his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: 1. _Pass +in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3. _MARCH_. + +At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and +halts. + +At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the +battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major +the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of +companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the +second change of direction; the major takes his post 30 paces in front +of the band immediately after the second change; the band having +passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left out of the column, +takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains +there until the review terminates. + +The major and staff salute, turn the head as in _eyes right_, and look +toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they +return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the +major has passed 6 paces beyond him. + +Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except +the drum major, commands: 1. _Eyes_, in time to add, 2. _RIGHT_, when +at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands _FRONT_ when at 6 +paces beyond him. At the command _eyes_ the company officers armed +with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the +command _right_ all turn head and eyes to the right, the company +officers complete _present saber_ and the noncommissioned officers +armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the +command _front_ all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and +noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber; +without arms in hand the first motion of the hand salute is made at +the command _right_ and the second motion not made until the command +_front_. + +Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of +subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes, +return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points +prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned +officers in command of subdivisions with arms in hand render the rifle +or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and direction do +not execute _eyes right_. + +If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the colors, the +regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when +at 6 paces beyond him. + +The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing +officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the +battalion has passed, then salutes, draws saber, and rejoins his +battalion. The band ceases to play when the column has completed its +second change of direction after passing the reviewing officer. + +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 10._) + +726. When the battalion arrives at its original position in column, +the major commands: 1. _Double time_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The band plays in double time. + +The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time +the command _eyes right_ is omitted and there is no saluting except by +the major when he leaves the reviewing officer. + +The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing +officer; the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed +by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in +review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it +to _quick time_. The battalion then executes such movements as the +reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade +ground and dismissed. + +Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing +officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his +battalion. + +727. At battalion review the major and his staff may be dismounted in +the discretion of the commanding officer. + + +_Regimental Review._ + +728. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses. + +In line the review proceeds as in the battalion, substituting +"colonel" for "major" and "regiment" for "battalion." + +To march the regiment in review, the colonel commands: _PASS IN +REVIEW_. The band changes direction, if necessary, and halts. Each +major then commands: 1. _Squads right_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The band marches at the command of the major of the leading battalion. + +At the second change of direction each major takes post 20 paces in +front of his leading company. + +The rear of the column having passed the reviewing officer, the +battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their parades +and dismissed. + +In line of masses, when the reviewing officer has passed around the +regiment, the colonel commands: _PASS IN REVIEW_. The band changes +direction, if necessary, and halts. The major of the right battalion +then commands: 1. _Column of squads, first company, squads right_, 2. +_MARCH_. At the third command the band and the leading company of the +right battalion move off. Each company and battalion in rear moves off +in time to follow at its proper distance. + +729. The review of a small body of troops composed of different arms +is conducted on the principles laid down for the regiment. The troops +of each arm are formed and marched according to the drill regulations +for that arm. + + +_Review of Large Commands._ + +730. A command consisting of one regiment, or less, and detachments of +other arms is formed for review as ordered by the commanding officer. +The principles of regimental review will be observed whenever +practicable. + +731. In the review of a brigade or larger command the _present arms_ +and the ride around the line by the reviewing officer are omitted. The +troops form and march in the order prescribed by the commanding +officer. + + +_PARADES._ + +_General Rules._ + +732. If dismounted, the officer receiving the parade, and his staff, +stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is sounding +off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted, they remain +at attention. + +733. At the command _report_, given by a battalion adjutant, the +captains in succession from the right salute and report: _A (_ or +_other) company, present_ or _accounted for_; or, _A (_or _other) +company, (so many) officers_ or _enlisted men absent_, and resume the +order saber; at the same command given by the regimental adjutant, the +majors similarly report their battalions. + + +_Battalion Parade._ + +734. At _adjutant's call_ the battalion is formed in line but not +presented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the center of +their respective platoons at the captain's command for dressing his +company on the line. The major takes post at a convenient distance in +front of the center and facing the battalion. + +The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the battalion, +after commanding: 1. _Guides_, 2. _POSTS_, adds: 1. _Parade_, 2. +_REST_; the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the +band: _SOUND OFF_. + +The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of +officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right, +when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases +playing, _retreat_ is sounded by the field music and, following the +last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the +_Star Spangled Banner_. + +Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention, +and, as the last note ends, commands: 1. _Battalion_, 2. _ATTENTION_, +3. _Present_, 4. _ARMS_, and salutes, retaining that position until +the last note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports: +_Sir, the parade is formed_. The major directs the adjutant: _Take +your post, Sir_. The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick +time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post. + +The major draws saber and commands: 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_, and adds +such exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers, +noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber, +and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that +position during the exercises in the manual. + +The major then directs the adjutant: _Receive the reports, Sir_. The +adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if +dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts +midway between it and the major, and commands: _REPORT_. + +The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: _Sir, all +are present or accounted for_; or _Sir, (so many) officers_ or +_enlisted men are absent_, including in the list of absentees those +from the band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior +to the parade. + +The major directs: _Publish the orders, Sir_. + +The adjutant turns about and commands: _Attention to orders_; he then +reads the orders, and commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _CENTER_, 3. +_MARCH_. + +At the command _center_, the company officers carry saber and face to +the center. At the command _march_, they close to the center and face +to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post. + +The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior +commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_. The officers advance, the band +playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the +guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces +from the major by the senior who commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_. +They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The +major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and +commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _POSTS_, 3. _MARCH_. + +At the command _posts_, company officers face about. + +At the command _march_, they step off with guide as before, and the +senior commands: 1. _Officers_, 2. _HALT_, so as to halt 3 paces from +the line; he then adds: 1. _POSTS_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _posts_, officers face outward and, at the command +_march_, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their +posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts +in rear of their companies. + +The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts. + +The major then commands: 1. _Pass in review_, 2. _Squads right_, 3. +_MARCH_, and returns saber. + +The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the +last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded. + +The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the +parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without +halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their +captains. + +When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them +to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move to +the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt +on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at +attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The +major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of +their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company +officers return saber with the major and remain at attention. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 19._) + + +_Regimental Parade._ + +735. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses; the +formation having proceeded up to, but not including the _present_, the +parade proceeds as described for the battalion, with the following +exceptions: + +"Colonel" is substituted for "major," "regiment" for "battalion," in +the description, and "battalions" for "battalion" in the commands. + +Lieutenants remain in the line of file closers. + +After publishing the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. _Officers, +center_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The company commanders remain at their posts with their companies. + +The field and staff officers form one line, closing on the center. The +senior commands: 1. _Forward_, 2. _MARCH_. + +The second major is the guide and marches on the colonel. + +After being dismissed by the colonel, each major moves individually to +the front, turns outward, and followed by his staff resumes his post +by the most direct line. The colonel directs the lieutenant colonel to +march the regiment in review; the latter moves to a point midway +between the colonel and the regiment and marches the regiment in +review as prescribed. If the lieutenant colonel is not present the +colonel gives the necessary commands for marching the regiment in +review. + + +_ESCORTS._ + +_Escort of the Color._ + +736. The regiment being in line, or line of masses, the colonel +details a company, other than the color company, to receive and escort +the national color to its place. During the ceremony the regimental +color remains with the color guard at its post with the regiment. + +The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field +officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the +designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the +color bearer or bearers between the platoons. + +The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or +quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the +right, the color bearer in the line of file closers. + +The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a +sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color. + +When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and +sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the +lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of +the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds +_to the color_; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute. + +Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to +their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band +taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself +between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide +left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so +conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the +right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to +its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the +escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing +between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the +colonel. + +The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30 +paces in front of the center of his regiment, faces about, commands: +1. _Present_, 2. _ARMS_, resumes his front, and salutes; the field +music sounds _to the color_; and the color bearer executes the color +salute at the command _present arms_. + +The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at +which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the +color company. + +The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at +the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in +column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its +place, passing around the left flank of the regiment. + +The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it +ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear +of the regiment. + +The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left +of the line. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 19._) + +737. Escort of the color is executed by a battalion according to the +same principles. + + +_Escorts of Honor._ + +738. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and +escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for +this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior +discipline. + +The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage +presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it +will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with +the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of +companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage +and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when +he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as +before. + +When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the +point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a +courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted +from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels +successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the +escort. + +An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as +he may have to make to the commander of the escort. + + +_Funeral Escort._ + +739. The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in Army +Regulations. + +The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band +on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march. + +Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: 1. +_Present_, 2. _ARMS_, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are +then brought to the order. + +The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or +squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The +procession is formed in the following order: 1. _Music_, 2. _Escort_, +3. _Clergy_, 4. _Coffin and pallbearers_, 5. _Mourners_, 6. _Members +of the former command of the deceased_, 7. _Other officers and +enlisted men_, 8. _Distinguished persons_, 9. _Delegations_, 10. +_Societies_, 11. _Civilians_. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and +7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors in front. + +The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in +march. + +The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived +opposite the grave, line is formed facing it. + +The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave; +arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin +having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are +brought to the order. + +The commander next commands: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. The escort +executes _parade rest_, officers and men inclining the head. + +When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into +the grave the commander causes the escort to resume attention and fire +three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being +elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion +is designated to fire the volleys. + +A musician then sounds _taps_. + +The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the +point where it was assembled, and dismissed. + +The band does not play until it has left the inclosure. + +When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the +escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march _at ease_ in +quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought +to attention. The music does not play while marching _at ease_. + +In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band +in playing. + +740. When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to +any of the following honors, the band plays the prescribed _national +air_, or the field music sounds _to the color_, _march_, _flourishes_, +or _ruffles_, according to the rank of the deceased, after which the +band plays an appropriate air. The commander of the escort, in forming +column, gives the appropriate commands for the different arms. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._) + +741. At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse, +in mourning caparison, follows the hearse. + +742. Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse +accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column +is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the +hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and +Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column, +face the column, and salute the remains as they pass. + +743. When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of the +deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented +upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they are borne +into the church. + +744. The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the +clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions. + + + + +INSPECTIONS. + + +_Company Inspection._ + +745. Being in line at a halt: 1. _Open ranks_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_ the front rank executes right dress; the rear +rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute +right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and +take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of +their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear +rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right +guide, facing to the left, and commands: 1. _FRONT_, 2. _PREPARE FOR +INSPECTION_. + +At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns +saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and +stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber, +face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to +accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the +close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company, +draw and carry saber. + +Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of +the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes +_inspection arms_. + +The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just +above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects +the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in +receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left +hand at the balance and executes _order arms_. + +As the captain returns the piece the next man executes _inspection +arms_, and so on through the company. + +Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes +_order arms_ as soon as the captain passes to the next man. + +The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right +in rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers. + +When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes _inspection +saber_. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute _inspection pistol_ +by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally +across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle +pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as +soon as the captain passes. + +Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the +left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and +commands: 1. _Close ranks_, 2. _MARCH_. + +At the command _march_ the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the +rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the +file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. + +746. If the company is dismissed, rifles are put away. In quarters, +headdress and accouterments are removed and the men stand near their +respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, but without +accouterments, in front of their tents. + +If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and +its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange +the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp, +or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the +same relative order as directed in paragraph 747. + +The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the +quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls +the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the +tents; the men stand at attention but do not salute. (_C.I.D.R., No. +16._) + +747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the equipment +while in ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company +to stack arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks +and to take intervals. He then commands: 1. _UNSLING EQUIPMENT_, 2. +_OPEN PACKS_. + +At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and places it on +the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end of the pack 1 foot +in front of toes. + +At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and +unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the +cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter tent pins, removes meat can, +knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the +right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can; +removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left +side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to +expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge +pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the +outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the +left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge +of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special +articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses, +compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right +half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI +shows the relative position of all articles except underwear and +special articles. + +The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers as before, +inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: _CLOSE +PACKS_. + +Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his +haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and +spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid +pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up +and replaces pack in carrier; and, leaving the equipment in its +position on the ground, resumes the attention. + +All equipments being packed, the captain commands: _SLING EQUIPMENT_. + +The equipments are slung and belts fastened. + +The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The +inspection is completed as already explained. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 16._) + +748. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after +commanding _front_, adds _REST_, and faces to the front. When the +inspector approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the +company to attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute +acknowledged, the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands: +_PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and again faces to the front. + +The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and +accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. + + +_Battalion Inspection._ + +749. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may either +precede or follow the review. + +The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all +officers dismounted, the major commands: 1. _Prepare for inspection_, +2. _MARCH_. + +At the first command each captain commands: _Open ranks_. + +At the command _march_ the ranks are opened in each company, as in the +inspection of the company. + +The field musicians join their companies. + +The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the +column, if not already there, and opens ranks. + +The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the +center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The +color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff. + +Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take +post in front of the column but accompany him. + +The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter, +inspects the staff officers. + +The major then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with his staff, +accompanies the inspector. + +If the major is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber, and +inspects his staff, which then accompanies him. + +The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a +minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and +the arms, accouterments, dress, and ammunition of each soldier of the +several companies in succession, and inspects the band. + +The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the +color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band. + +The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as +inspected. + +[Illustration: Plate VI.] + +750. As the inspector approaches each company its captain commands: 1. +_Company_, 2. _ATTENTION_, 3. _PREPARE FOR INSPECTION_, and faces to +the front; as soon as inspected he returns saber and accompanies the +inspector. The inspection proceeds as in company inspection. At its +completion the captain closes ranks and commands: _REST_. Unless +otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the +company be marched to its parade and dismissed. + +751. If the inspection will probably last a long time the rear +companies may be permitted to stack arms and fall out; before the +inspector approaches they fall in and take arms. + +752. The band plays during the inspection of the companies. + +When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: _PREPARE +FOR INSPECTION_. + +As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in +front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then +returns it. + +Company musicians execute inspection similarly. + +753. At the inspection of quarters or camp the inspector is +accompanied by the captain, followed by the other officers or by such +of them as he may designate. The inspection is conducted as described +in the company inspection. + + +_Regimental Inspection._ + +754. The commands, means, and principles are the same as described for +a battalion. + +The colonel takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of +the major of the leading battalion. His staff takes post as if +mounted. The color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff. + +The inspector inspects the colonel and the lieutenant colonel, and, +accompanied by the colonel, inspects the staff officers. + +The colonel then commands: _REST_, returns saber, and, with the +lieutenant colonel and staff, accompanies the inspector. + +If the colonel is the inspector he commands: _REST_, returns saber, +and inspects the lieutenant colonel and staff, all of whom then +accompany him. + +The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, makes a minute +inspection of the color guard, noncommissioned staff, each battalion +in succession, and the band. + +On the approach of the inspector each major brings his battalion to +attention. Battalion inspection follows. + + + + +MUSTER. + + +_Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster._ + +755. Muster is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a +review. + +The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and +band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll +of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing +cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll. + +756. Being in column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the +mustering officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder +arms, and commands: _ATTENTION TO MUSTER_. + +The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll; +each man, as his name is called, answers _Here_ and brings his piece +to order arms. + +After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company +commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the +presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc. + +757. A company may be mustered in the same manner on its own parade +ground, the muster to follow the company inspection. + + + + +HONORS AND SALUTES. + + +758. Further rules governing honors, courtesies, etc., are prescribed +in Army Regulations. + +759. (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted men +not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, on +every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the +officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first. + +(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted +men, the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when +all rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer +leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop +eating and remain seated at attention. + +(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, +faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing he faces +an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same +place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated. +Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer +unless addressed by him. + +(4) Before addressing an officer, an enlisted man makes the prescribed +salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or, if unarmed, with +the right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply. + +(5) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, officers +and enlisted men salute military persons as follows: With arms in +hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on interior guard +duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute. + +(6) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men +salute military persons with the right-hand salute. + +(7) Officers and enlisted men will render the prescribed salutes in a +military manner, the officer junior in rank, or the enlisted men, +saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted, all +entitled to the salute shall return it. + +(8) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign +conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing +a superior officer not mounted. + +(9) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but +shall come to attention if at rest or at ease. + +(10) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. In +general, it does not exceed 30 paces. + +(11) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body +of troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of +the commander. + +(12) In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars, +and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes +may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy +civilians present. + +(13) Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same +compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and +Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of +their own regiment, corps, or arm of service. + +(14) Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the +foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with +the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper +performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as +prescribed in drill regulations. (_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +760. (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute +officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit, by +first bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by +subparagraph (5), paragraph 759. If the person saluted is of a junior +or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of +salutes. + +(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will +exchange salutes, both commands being at attention. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +761. Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually +engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or +simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay +no compliments whatever. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +762. If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and armed +with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to _present +arms_ or _present sabers_ before its commander salutes in the +following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when _to the +color_ or _to the standard_ is sounded during ceremonies, or when a +person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a +general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +763. At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall +render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of +salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and +during ceremonies when _to the color_ is played, if no band is +present. If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to +attention at the first note of the National Anthem, _to the color_ or +_to the standard_, and the salute rendered by the officer or +noncommissioned officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as +amended herein. + +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 6 and 17._) + +764. Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when persons +belonging to the military service are present, all officers and +enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing toward +the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the flag). +If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in civilian clothes, +uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of the anthem, +retaining the position of salute until the last note of the anthem. +If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the first note of +the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder and so +remain until its close, except that in inclement weather the headdress +may be slightly raised. + +The same rules apply when _to the color_ or _to the standard_ is +sounded as when the National Anthem is played. + +When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played +through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to +make it complete. + +The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing +of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the +national anthem of any other country when played upon official +occasions. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + +765. Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render +honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by +subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered, +they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder +with the right hand; if uncovered they will salute with the right-hand +salute. + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 17._) + + + + +PART V.--MANUALS. + + + + +THE COLOR. + + +766. The word "color" implies the national color; it includes the +regimental color when both are present. + +The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and +battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations. + +767. In garrison the colors, when not in use, are kept in the office +or quarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by +the color guard. In camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of +the colonel's tent. From reveille to retreat, when the weather +permits, they are displayed uncased; from retreat to reveille and +during inclement weather they are cased. + +Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil-cloth +covering. + +768. The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the +color, and when saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no +other case. + +If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer +entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him. + +The national color renders no salute. (_C.I.D.R., No. 6._) + + +_The Color Guard._ + +769. The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the +color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel. +The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color +sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when +carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever +direction they may face. + +770. The color guard is formed and marched in one rank, the color +bearers in the center. It is marched in the same manner and by the +same commands as a squad, substituting, when necessary, _guard_ for +_squad_. + +771. The color company is the center or right center company of the +center or right center battalion. The color guard remains with that +company unless otherwise directed. + +772. In line the color guard is in the interval between the inner +guides of the right and left center companies. + +In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between +the right and left center companies and on line with the captains. + +In column of companies or platoons the color guard is midway between +the color company and the company in rear of the color company and +equidistant from the flanks of the column. + +In close column the color guard is on the flank of the color company. + +In column of squads the color guard is in the column between the color +company and the company originally on its left. + +When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the +color forms on the left of the leading company of the center (right +center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the regiment +changes from line of masses. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +773. The color guard when with a battalion that takes the battle +formation, joins the regimental reserve, whose commander directs the +color guard to join a certain company of the reserve. (_C.I.D.R., No. +2._) + +774. The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in +rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill, +all movements unless specially excused. + + +_To Receive the Color._ + +775. The color guard, by command of the senior color sergeant, +presents arms on receiving and parting with the color. After parting +with the color, the color guard is brought to order arms by command of +the senior member who is placed as the right man of the guard. + +776. At drills and ceremonies, excepting _escort of the color_, the +color, if present, is received by the color company after its +formation. + +The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the +front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches +from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain, +who then faces about, brings the company to the present, faces to the +front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the order. +The color guard comes to the present and order at the command of the +captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant directly to its +post on the left of the color company. + +777. When the battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color +to the office or quarters of the colonel. + + +_Manual of the Color._ + +778. At the _carry_ the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the +sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder. + +At the _order_ the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the right +toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position. + +At _parade rest_ the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the +_order_; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of +the body, left hand uppermost. + +The _order_ is resumed at the command _attention_. + +The left hand assists the right when necessary. + +The _carry_ is the habitual position when the troops are at a +shoulder, port, or trail. + +The _order_ and _parade rest_ are executed with the troops. + +_The color salute:_ Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike +to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm +to the front. + + + + +THE BAND. + + +779. The band is formed in two or more ranks, with sufficient +intervals between the men and distances between the ranks to permit of +a free use of the instruments. + +The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the band; when +the band is not present the posts, movements, and duties of the field +music are the same as prescribed for the band; when a musician is in +charge his position is on the right of the front rank. When the +battalion or regiment turns about by squads, the band executes the +countermarch; when the battalion or regiment executes _right_, _left_, +or _about face_, the band faces in the same manner. + +In marching, each rank dresses to the right. + +In executing _open ranks_ each rank of the band takes the distance of +3 paces from the rank next in front; the drum major verifies the +alignment. + +The field music sounds the _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_, and +_to the color_ at the signal of the drum major. + +780. The drum major is 3 paces in front of the center of the front +rank, and gives the signals or commands for the movements of the band +as for a squad, substituting in the commands _band_ for _squad_. + + +_Signals of the Drum Major._ + +781. Preparatory to a signal the staff is held with the right hand +near the head of the staff, hand below the chin, back to the front, +ferrule pointed upward and to the right. + +_Prepare to play:_ Face toward the band and extend the right arm to +its full length in the direction of the staff. _Play:_ Bring the arm +back to its original position in front of the body. + +_Prepare to cease playing:_ Extend the right arm to its full length in +the direction of the staff. _Cease playing:_ Bring the arm back to its +original position in front of the body. + +_To march:_ Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front, the +ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm to its full +length in the direction of the staff. + +_To halt:_ Lower the staff into the raised left hand and raise the +staff horizontally above the head with both hands, the arms extended; +lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal position at the height +of the hips. + +_To countermarch:_ Face toward the band and give the signal _to +march_. The countermarch is executed by each front-rank man to the +right of the drum major turning to the right about, each to the left, +turning to the left about, each followed by the men covering him. The +drum major passes through the center. + +_To oblique:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position, the head of +the staff opposite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direction the +oblique is to be made; extend the arm to its full length in the +direction of the staff. + +_To march by the right flank:_ Extend the arm to the right, the staff +vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the rear. + +_To march by the left flank:_ Extend the arm to the left, the staff +vertical, ferrule upward, back of the hand to the front. + +_To diminish front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the +height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip. + +_To increase front:_ Let the ferrule fall into the left hand at the +height of the hip, right hand at the height of the neck. + +The _march_, _flourishes_, or _ruffles_: Bring the staff to a vertical +position, hand opposite the neck, back of the hand to the front, +ferrule pointing down. + +_To the color:_ Bring the staff to a horizontal position at the height +of the neck, back of the hand to the rear, ferrule pointing to the +left. + +When the band is playing, in marching, the drum major beats the time +with his staff and supports the left hand at the hip, fingers in +front, thumb to the rear. + +The drum major, with staff in hand, salutes by bringing his staff to a +vertical position, head of the staff up and opposite the left +shoulder. + +The drum major, marching in review with staff in hand, salutes by +bringing his staff to a vertical position, head of the staff up and +opposite the left shoulder. + +At a halt, and the band not playing, the drum major holds his staff +with the ferrule touching the ground about 1 inch from toe of right +foot, at an angle of about 60 deg., ball pointing upward to the right, +right hand grasping staff near the ball, back of the hand to the +front: left hand at the hip, fingers in front, thumb to the rear. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 6._) + + + + +MANUAL OF THE SABER. + + +782. 1. _Draw_, 2. _SABER_. + +At the command _draw_ unhook the saber with the thumb and first two +fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers +lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the +upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the +right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing +the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand. + +At the command _saber_ draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its +full extent to the right front, at an angle of about 45 deg. with the +horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm; +make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the +shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side, +elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same +time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the +left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop +the left hand by the side. + +_This is the position of carry saber dismounted._ + +Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the +scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of _draw +saber_ they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without +the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at +the _carry_ rests on the right thigh. + +On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up. + +783. When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held +suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot +is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off +after returning saber. + +784. Being at the order or carry: 1. _Present_, 2. _SABER_ (or +_ARMS_). + +At the command _present_ raise and carry the saber to the front, base +of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck, +edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt, +thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the +grip. + +At the command _saber_, or _arms_, lower the saber, point in +prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left, +hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the +hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front +of the stirrup. + +In rendering honors with troops officers execute the first motion of +the salute at the command _present_, the second motion at the command +_arms_; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the +command _arms_ and omit the second motion. + +785. Being at a carry: 1. _Order_, 2. _SABER_ (or _ARMS_). + +Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near +the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip. + +Being at the _present saber_, should the next command be _order arms_, +officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber _order +saber_; if the command be other than _order arms_, they execute _carry +saber_. + +When arms are brought to the order the officers or enlisted men with +the saber drawn _order saber_. + +786. The saber is held at the carry while giving commands, marching at +attention, or changing position in quick time. + +When at the order sabers are brought to the carry when arms are +brought to any position except the _present_ or _parade rest_. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +787. Being at the order: 1. _Parade_, 2. _REST_. + +Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is +uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the +ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right. + +At the command _attention_ resume the order saber and the position of +the soldier. + +788. In marching in double time the saber is carried diagonally across +the breast, edge to the front; the left hand steadies the scabbard. + +789. Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on +all duties under arms draw and return saber without waiting for +command. All commands to soldiers under arms are given with the saber +drawn. + +790. Being at a carry: 1. _Return_, 2. _SABER_. + +At the command _return_ carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches +from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same +time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at +the upper band. + +At the command _saber_ drop the point to the rear and pass the blade +across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left, +fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand, +insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if +inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by +the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand +by the side. + +Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when +mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is +hooked up on dismounting. + +791. At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first +motion of _present saber_ and turn the wrist to show both sides of the +blade, resuming the carry when the inspector has passed. + + + + +MANUAL OF TENT PITCHING. + + +_Shelter Tents._ + +792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: +_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_. + +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a +file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first +sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the +company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken +from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers +form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons, +preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two +or more platoons, regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as +described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_. + +At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the +right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt +of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front, +barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man +then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of +the right heel. + +Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed; +each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear, +flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half +on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at +both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes +provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy +rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both +ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle +under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to +the front, heel of butt on the ground beside the bayonet. His +rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of +bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye +of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front +of the rifle as to hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the +tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the +tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching +tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge +inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear +guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the +rear-rank man working on the right. + +The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on +the tent. + +As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the +contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of +his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin. + +To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes +should all be of the same length. + +In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is +procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle +and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent. +(_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2, 5 and 8._) + +794. When the pack is not carried the company is formed for shelter +tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the ground, the +men are dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure their packs, return +to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore described. + +795. Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent as +heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the opening +of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and passing the +front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite tents. The +front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown back to +permit an opening into the tent. + + +_Single Sleeping Bag._ + +796. Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet, +buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short +dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side +of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means +of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the +blanket and button it together along the side and bottom. + + +_Double Sleeping Bag._ + +797. Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet, +buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho; +tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread +a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet, +buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both +sides and across the end. + + +_To Strike Shelter Tents._ + +798. The men standing in front of their tents: _STRIKE TENTS_. + +Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are +lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at +attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 8._) + + +_Common and Wall Tents._ + +799. To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall +tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be +occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal +tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet, +which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on +the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used. +Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and +place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or +doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the +bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left +(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the +pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already +driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the +rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to +complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops. +Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front +corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small +amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven. +According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the +tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or +ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes +are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the +tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at +each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or +storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. +The four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of +the large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such +distance as to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth +when the guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through +each remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven +in line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the +tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly +are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace +ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed. +(_C.I.D.R., No. 11._) + +800. Rescinded. (_C.I.D.R., No. 11._) + + +_Conical Wall Tent._ + +801. Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using +the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two concentric +circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer +circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3 +feet drive the other guy pin. + +In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case +of pyramidal tents. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + + +_To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents._ + +802. _STRIKE TENTS._ + +The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy +ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall +tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle. + +One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is +lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole +fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. + + +_To Fold Tents._ + +803. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the +tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side +walls are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; +fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it +rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent +in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in +two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second +from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the +second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of +the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the +bundle; tie with the two exposed guys. + + +_Method of Folding Pyramidal Tent._ + +The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas +pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the +rear-corner wall pins in the ground with the wall loops attached, one +man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a +perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from +the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of +the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle. + +Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear +corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and +pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to +the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side +of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the +front side of tent. + +Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described +above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the +tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each +on itself. + +Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward +toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron +as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with +the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas +kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the +canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on +the center width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge +to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold +toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second +widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded +canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle width. Then +fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then begin +folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then +making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that +already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take +the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle +over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn +bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise. + +When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by +23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack. + +Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle +width of canvas in the back wall. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 1 and 8._) + + + + +MANUAL OF THE BUGLE. + + +_Warning Calls._ + +804. _First call_, _guard mounting_, _full dress_, _overcoats_, +_drill_, _stable_, _water_, and _boots and saddles_ precede the +_assembly_ by such interval as may be prescribed by the commanding +officer. + +_Mess_, _church_, and _fatigue_, classed as service calls, may also be +used as warning calls. + +_First call_ is the first signal for formation for roll call and for +all ceremonies except guard mounting. + +_Guard mounting_ is the first signal for guard mounting. + +The field music assembles at _first call_ and _guard mounting_. + +In a mixed command, _boots and saddles_ is the signal to mounted +troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard +mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal _guard +mounting_ or _drill_. + +When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the _full dress_ or +_overcoat_ call immediately follows _first call_, _guard mounting_, or +_boots and saddles_. + + +_Formation Calls._ + +805. _Assembly:_ The signal for companies or details to fall in. + +_Adjutant's call:_ The signal for companies to form battalion; also +for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or +garrison parade ground; it follows the _assembly_ at such interval as +may be prescribed by the commanding officer. + +It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment, +following the first _adjutant's call_ at such interval as the +commanding officer may prescribe. + +_To the color:_ Is sounded when the color salutes. + + +_Alarm Calls._ + +806. _Fire call:_ The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to +extinguish fire. + +_To arms:_ The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their +company parade grounds as quickly as possible. + +_To horse:_ The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their +horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as +possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops. + + +_Service Calls._ + +807. _Tattoo_, _taps_, _mess_, _sick_, _church_, _recall_, _issue_, +_officers'_, _captains'_, _first sergeants'_, _fatigue_, _school_, and +_the general_. + +_The general_ is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons +preparatory to marching. + +_Reveille_ precedes the _assembly_ for roll call; _retreat_ follows +the _assembly_, the interval between being only that required for +formation and roll call, except when there is parade. + +_Taps_ is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded +by _call to quarters_ by such interval as prescribed by Army +Regulations. + +_Assembly_, _reveille_, _retreat_, _adjutant's call_, _to the color_, +the _flourishes_, _ruffles_, and the _marches_ are sounded by all the +field music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the +musician of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the +_assembly_ when the musicians are not united. + +The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if marches +be played before _reveille_, it is fired at the commencement of the +first march. + +The evening gun is fired at the last note of _retreat_. + + +BUGLE CALLS. + +1. FIRST CALL. + +[Music illustration] + +2. GUARD MOUNTING. + +[Music illustration] + +3. FULL DRESS. + +[Music illustration] + +4. OVERCOATS. + +[Music illustration] + +5. DRILL. + +[Music illustration] + +6. STABLE. + +[Music illustration] + +7. WATER. + +[Music illustration] + +8. BOOTS AND SADDLES. + +[Music illustration] + +9. ASSEMBLY. + +[Music illustration] + +10. ADJUTANT'S CALL. + +[Music illustration] + +11. TO THE COLOR. + +[Music illustration] + +12. FIRE. + +[Music illustration] + +13. TO ARMS. + +[Music illustration] + +14. TO HORSE. + +[Music illustration] + +15. REVEILLE. + +[Music illustration] + +16. RETREAT. + +[Music illustration] + +17. TATTOO. + +[Music illustration] + +18. CALL TO QUARTERS. + +[Music illustration] + +19. TAPS. + +[Music illustration] + +20. MESS. + +[Music illustration] + +21. SICK. + +[Music illustration] + +22. CHURCH. + +[Music illustration] + +23. RECALL. + +[Music illustration] + +24. ISSUE. + +[Music illustration] + +25. OFFICERS' CALL. + +[Music illustration] + +26. CAPTAINS' CALL. + +[Music illustration] + +27. FIRST SERGEANTS' CALL. + +[Music illustration] + +28. FATIGUE. + +[Music illustration] + +29. SCHOOL. + +[Music illustration] + +29-1/2. THE GENERAL'S MARCH. + +[Music illustration] + +(_C.I.D.R. No. 8, Sept. 3, 1914._) + +30. THE GENERAL. + +[Music illustration] + +30-1/2. FLOURISHES FOR REVIEW. + +[Music illustration] + +(_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + + +BUGLE SIGNALS. + +See paragraph 41. + +31. ASSEMBLE. MARCH. + +Same as _Assembly_, No. 9. + +32. ATTENTION. + +[Music illustration] + +33. ATTENTION TO ORDERS. + +[Music illustration] + +34. FORWARD. MARCH. + +[Music illustration] + +35. HALT. + +[Music illustration] + +36. DOUBLE TIME. MARCH. + +[Music illustration] + +37. TO THE REAR. MARCH. + +[Music illustration] + +38. COMMENCE FIRING. + +[Music illustration] + +39. CEASE FIRING. + +[Music illustration] + +40. FIX BAYONETS. + +[Music illustration] + +41. CHARGE. + +[Music illustration] + + + + +APPENDIX A. + + +WAR DEPARTMENT, +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, +_Washington, December 2, 1911._ + +The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use +of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For +the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine +rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published +and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding +paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 142, +148, and 150. + +By order of the Secretary of War: + +LEONARD WOOD, +_Major General, Chief of Staff_. + + +75.... Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the +magazine.... + +96. Being at order arms: 1. _Unfix, BAYONET._ + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of +parade rest, grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right +hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the +bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the +piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and, +glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing +between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand +and resume the order. + +If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet +from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the +most convenient manner. + +If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the +most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the +original position. + +Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but +not in cadence. + +98. Being at order arms: 1. _Inspection_, 2. _ARMS_. + +At the second command, take the position of port arms. (_TWO_) With +the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw +the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found +them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the +front. + +99. Being at inspection arms: 1. _Order (Right shoulder, port)_, 2. +_ARMS_. + +At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. +At the command _arms_, complete the movement ordered. + +134. Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute other +movements with the pieces loaded: 1. _Lock_, 2. _PIECES_. + +At the command _Pieces_ turn the safety lock fully to the right. + +The safety lock is said to be at the "ready" when turned to the left, +and at the "safe" when turned to the right. + +The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "off" when turned +down. + +139. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. _With dummy (blank or +ball) cartridges_, 2. _LOAD_. + +At the command _load_ each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half +right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such +position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the +body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at +the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height +of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back, +takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers find places +it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the +bolt handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down +the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each +rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position +opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of +the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads. + +A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly +as practicable in the position of load. + +If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the +elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left hand +steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt +resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. + +For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down) +are designated as that of _load_. + +141. _FILL MAGAZINE._ + +Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the +magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or +belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine, +turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of +the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small +of the stock. + +To load from the magazine the command _From magazine_ will be given +preceding that of _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned up on coming to +the position of _load_. + +To resume loading from the belt the command _From belt_ will be given +preceding the command _LOAD_; the _cut-off_ will be turned down on +coming to the position of _load_. + +The commands _from magazine_ and _from belt_, indicating the change in +the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands. + +The words _from belt_ apply to cartridge box as well as belt. + +In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt +fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back, +as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the +chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following. + +To fire from the magazine, the command _MAGAZINE FIRE_ may be given at +any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is +executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down +and the firing continued, loading from the belt. + +_Magazine fire_ is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon +leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes +necessary. + +142. _UNLOAD._ + +All take the position of load, turn the _cut-off_ up, if not already +there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and +close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last +cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The +cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or +belt, and the piece brought to the order. + +148. _CLIP FIRE._ + +Turn the cut-off up; _fire at will_ (reloading from the magazine) +until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off +down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of _suspend firing_. + +150. _CEASE FIRING._ + +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of +load, the cartridge is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the +trigger is pulled, sights are laid down, and the piece is brought to +the order. + +_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position or to steady the men. + + + + +APPENDIX B. + + +WAR DEPARTMENT, +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, +_Washington, December 2, 1911._ + +Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infantry Drill +Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry +Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No. +23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the +alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern. + +By order of the Secretary of War: + +LEONARD WOOD, +_Major General, Chief of Staff._ + + +747. If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket +rolls the captain, before dismissing the company and after inspecting +the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in place, closes +ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four paces from the +stacks, takes intervals, and commands: 1. _Unsling_, 2. _PACKS_, 3. +_Open_, 4. _PACKS_. + +At the second command each man unslings his roll and places it on the +ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter +half to the right. + +At the fourth command the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the +front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front, +opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of +his roll for inspection and resumes the attention. + +The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file +closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws +saber and commands: 1. _Close_, 2. _PACKS_. + +At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread +on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds +his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter +half, fold toward the bottom, edge one-half inch from the square end, +the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then +places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the +square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole +about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly +near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other +articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the +exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket. + +The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front +and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and +two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on +the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the +straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle, +back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on +the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when +looking vertically downward one end is bent upward and over to meet +the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the +end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting +the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer. + +As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in +the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention. + +All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: 1. _Sling_, 2. +_PACKS_. + +At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole +to the rear. + +The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the +inspection as before. + +792. Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands: +_FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS_. + +The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a +file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first +sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the +company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken +from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers +form on a convenient flank. Before forming column of platoons, +preparatory to pitching tents, the company may be redivided into two +or more platoons regardless of the size of each. (_C.I.D.R., No. 2._) + +793. The captain then causes the company to take intervals as +described in the School of the Squad, and commands: _PITCH TENTS_. + +At the command _pitch tents_, each man steps off obliquely to the +right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt +of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front, +barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front rank man +then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of +the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out +the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half, +triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, rear +rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. +Each front rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the +halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet placed in the +ground; his rear rank man, using the pins in front, pins down the +front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching the +canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and drives +the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the rope +taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear rank man adjusts +the pole and the front rank man drives the pins. The rest of the pins +are then driven by both men, the rear rank man working on the right. + +As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the +blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own +half on line with the front guy rope pin. + +The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are +pitched, should all be of the same length. (_C.I.D.R., Nos. 2 and 8._) + +794. When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as +described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a +bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the +wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as +heretofore described. + +795. To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same commands +as before, except _Take half interval_ is given instead of _Take +interval_. In taking interval each man follows the preceding man at 2 +paces. The captain then commands: _PITCH DOUBLE TENTS_. + +The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and +with him pitches a single shelter tent. + +Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet. + +The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single +tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes +are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner +pins. + +The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by +numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left +are numbered, counting off if necessary. + +All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to +occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to +the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the +ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are +pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the +even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear +corners. + +While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front +rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even +number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the +shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front +tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the +front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are +then adjusted. + +The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back, +contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at _attention_, each +opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. + +796. Omitted. + +797. Omitted. + +798. Omitted. + + + + +APPENDIX C. + +MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. + + +WAR DEPARTMENT, +OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF, +_Washington, February 20, 1918_. + +The following Manual of the Bayonet, prepared by a board consisting of +Capt. Herschel Tupes, First Infantry, and Capt. Grosvenor L. Townsend, +First Infantry, is approved and issued for the information and +government of the Regular Army and the Organized Militia of the United +States. + +By order of the Secretary of War. + +LEONARD WOOD, +_Major General, Chief of Staff_. + + + + +MANUAL OF THE BAYONET. + +UNITED STATES ARMY. + + +1. The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable the +enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary to +obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the +rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. + +2. The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to make +effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to make him +quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an accurate +eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the bayonet in +offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been acquired, +the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at close quarters +should the bayonet be lost or disabled. + +3. Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged by +the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose +pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits +and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing +equipment provided for the purpose. + +4. Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed +noncommissioned officers will act as instructors. + +5. Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the soldier +is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress, as far +as practicable, in the order followed in the text. + +6. Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but practice should +also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and defense of +intrenchments. + +7. These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill. + +8. The principles of the commands are the same as those given in +paragraphs 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. Intervals and +distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and 111, Infantry Drill +Regulations, except that, in formations for bayonet exercises, the men +should be at least four paces apart in every direction. + +9. Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a movement +for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the purpose +of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to execute the +movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual will not be +executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in incomplete +execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed correctly +as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the movements are +executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as expertness +with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion. + +10. The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and frequent +rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is attained. +Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as they +prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay the +progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position of +order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations. + + +THE BAYONET. + +NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION. + +11. The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of three +principal parts, viz, the _blade_, _guard_, and _grip_. + +[Illustration] + +12. The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back, +grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point +is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches. +Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the +bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds. +The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in +front of the rear sight. + + +I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE. + +13. The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and +impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of +body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to +parry and deliver a strong point or cut. + +14. All foot movements should be made from the position of _guard_. As +far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to +insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down +as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely +on the situations occurring in combat. + +15. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands: + +1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_. + +At the command _guard_, half face to the right, carry back and place +the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about +3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of +about 60 deg., weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the +feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the +front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the +front. + +16. To resume the attention, 1. _Squad_, 2. _ATTENTION_. The men take +the position of the soldier and fix their attention. + +17. _ADVANCE._ Advance the left foot quickly about once its length, +follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. + +18. _RETIRE._ Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its +length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance. + +19. 1. _Front_, 2. _PASS_. Place the right foot quickly about once its +length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper +position in front of the right. + +20. 1. _Rear_, 2. _PASS_. Place the left foot quickly about once its +length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper +position in rear of the left. + +The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to +withdraw quickly therefrom. + +21. 1. _Right_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the right with the right foot about +once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative +position. + +22. 1. _Left_, 2. _STEP_. Step to the left with the left foot about +once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative +position. + +These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more +favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better +ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet +fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the +right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight. + + +II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE. + +23. The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the +same as already given for movements without the rifle. + +24. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands: + +1. _Bayonet exercise_, 2. _GUARD_. + +At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the +same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with +the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and +gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping +the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip, +elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin. + +25. 1. _Order_, 2. _ARMS_. + +Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of +order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. + +26. During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be +executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they +may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held. + +[Illustration: Par. 27. Par. 24.] + + +ATTACKS. + +27. 1. _THRUST._ + +Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm, +turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at +the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the same +time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the +body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on +the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command. + +The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm, +the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the +attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach, +chest, head, neck, and limbs. + +[Illustration: Par. 28.] + +28. 1. _LUNGE._ + +Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot +is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always +be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without +command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for +any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the +latter case, the preparatory common _forward_ will be given. Each +method should be practiced. + +[Illustration: Par. 29.] + +29. 1. _Butt_, 2. _STRIKE_. + +Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle +against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about +the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the +rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command. + +The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck, +stomach, and crotch. + +30. 1. _Cut_, 2. _DOWN_. + +Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of +attack. Guard is resumed without command. + +31. 1. _Cut_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_. + +With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left), +directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without +command. + +The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an +enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false, +or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in +continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. + +32. To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will +change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for +example: 1. _To the right rear_, 2. _Cut_, 3. _DOWN_; 1. _To the +right_, 2. _LUNGE_; 1. _To the left_, 2. _THRUST_, etc. + +Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the +body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best +accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of +guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +[Illustration: Par. 33. Par. 36.] + +33. Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting and +lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings or +other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably +suspended at desired heights. + +34. The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by +endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by +directing the attack against one opening while looking at another. + +35. The soldier should also experience the effect of actual resistance +offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in attacks. This will +be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy. + +36. Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the +execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the +bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can +be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely +together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is +preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc., +are also suitable. + + +DEFENSES. + +37. In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard is +resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become +proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of +guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry. + +38. 1. _Parry_, 2. _RIGHT_. + +Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply +to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6 +inches to the right. + +39. 1. _Parry_, 2. _LEFT_. + +Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to +cover the point attacked. + +[Illustration: Par. 40. Par 41.] + +40. 1. _Parry_, 2. _HIGH_. + +Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of +vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front. + +When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be +supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This +position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations, +such as men mounted or on top of parapets. + +[Illustration: Par. 41. Par. 44.] + +41. 1. _Low parry_, 2. _RIGHT (LEFT)_. + +Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the +knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left) +to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened. + +These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist, leaves +the head and body exposed. + +42. Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short +motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far +as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against _butt +strike_ are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point +attacked. + +43. To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the +soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most +convenient manner; for example: 1. _To the left rear_, 2. _Parry_, 3. +_HIGH_; 1. _To the right_, 2. _Parry_, 3. _RIGHT_, etc. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of +guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is +danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a +vertical position. + +[Illustration: Par. 44.] + + +III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET. + +44. 1. _Club rifle_, 2. _SWING_. + +Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn +the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and +muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at +the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the +opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and +knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet, +shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity. +_SWING._ Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the +front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and +immediately return to the position of _club rifle_ by completing the +swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command, +_SWING_. + +The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any +guard or parry that may be interposed. + +Being at _club rifle_, order arms is resumed by command. + +The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited. + +45. The position of _club rifle_ may be taken from any position of the +rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in +personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of +the bayonet. + + +IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS. + +46. The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous +attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single +movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the +reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an +attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of +the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied +by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to +the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses. + +47. Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. The +instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are to +be combined as _two movements_ or _three movements_. The execution is +determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard is +taken upon the completion of the last movement only. + + +EXAMPLES. + + _Front pass and LUNGE._ + _Right step and THRUST._ + _Left step and low parry RIGHT._ + _Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE._ + _Lunge and cut RIGHT._ + _Parry right and parry HIGH._ + _Butt strike and cut DOWN._ + _Thrust and parry HIGH._ + _Parry high and LUNGE._ + _Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT._ + _Right step, parry left and cut DOWN._ + _To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN._ + _To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE._ + +48. Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be +made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. + + +V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT. + +49. The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as far +as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet exercises. + +50. The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme +importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack +fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the +opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent +on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take +the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the +offensive and take immediate advantage of it. + +51. Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. Time +for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a single +hasty glance. + +52. In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be +plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point +of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night +attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body. + +53. Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The +point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in +the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to +the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for +attack or defense. + +54. Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left hand. +His position of _guard_ will not differ materially from that described +in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, he will be +at a great disadvantage. + +55. The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is particularly +useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a sentry can +strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. + +56. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the +muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will +be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short, +stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon. + +57. The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and +lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and +advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp +parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed +to a counter attack, which should follow promptly. + +58. Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage by +grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from behind. + +59. In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must be +made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is much +shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable such +an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the horseman. + +60. In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best +observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach +generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within +attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle +of his body. + + +VI. FENCING EXERCISES. + +61. Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of thrusts, +parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, the +opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. + +62. The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before +the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such +condition as will prevent accidents. + +63. The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order, +facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a +distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as +number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. + +64. The opponents being at the order facing each other, the instructor +commands: _SALUTE_. + +Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to +the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.) +Drop the arm smartly by the side. + +This salute is the fencing salute. + +All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will +begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute. + +65. After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor +commands: 1. _Fencing exercise_, 2. _GUARD_. + +At the command _guard_ each man comes to the position of _guard_, +heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing +lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the +opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the _engage_ or _engage +right_. + +66. Being at the _engage right_: _ENGAGE LEFT_. + +The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, +each man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the +corresponding portion of the opponent's bayonet. + +67. Being at _engage left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT_. + +The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +left and _engages_. + +68. Being _engaged_: _ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT_. + +The attack _engages left_ and then immediately _engages right_. + +69. Being _engaged left_: _ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT_. + +The attack _engages right_ and then immediately _engages left_. + +70. 1. _Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)_; 2. _Number two, COUNTER_. + +Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly +drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original +position. + +71. In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a +certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the +play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is +necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack. +It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his +assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is +controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary. + +72. After some exercise in _engage_, _engage left_, and _counter_, +exercises will be given in the _assaults_. + + +ASSAULTS. + +73. The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, as +head, heck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the +knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are +first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at +the command _assault_. Number one executes the attack, and number two +parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one +parries. + +74. For convenience in instruction _assaults_ are divided into _simple +attacks_, _counter attacks_, _attacks on the rifle_, and _feints_. + + +SIMPLE ATTACKS. + +75. Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There +are three simple attacks--the _straight_, the _disengagement_, and the +_counter disengagement_. They are not preceded by a feint. + +76. In the _straight_ the bayonet is directed straight at an opening +from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may, or +may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low, +contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the +attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in +the engage may be continued in the attack. + +Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one, at neck_ (head, +chest, right leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3. +_ASSAULT_. + +77. In the _disengagement_ contact with the opponent's rifle is +abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled _under_ or _over_ +his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This +attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet +from the moment contact is abandoned. + +Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number one_, at stomach +(left chest, left leg, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_ +(etc.); 3. _ASSAULT_. + +78. In the _counter disengagement_ a swift attack is made into the +opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the +engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral +movement of the bayonet into the opening. + +Example: Being at the _engage right_, 1. _Number two, engage left_; 2. +_Number one_, at chest, _thrust_; 3. _Number two, parry left_; 4. +_ASSAULT_. + +Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the +opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. + +79. A _counter attack_ or _return_ is one made instantly after or in +continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible. +This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter +parry. The counter attack should also be made at, or just before, the +full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a +simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the +opponent's body. + +Example: Being at _engage_, 1. _Number two_, at chest, _lunge_; 2. +_Number one, parry right_, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), +_thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + + +ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE. + +80. These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or disclosing +an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the _press_, +the _beat_, and the _twist_. + +81. In the _press_ the attack quickly presses against the opponent's +bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack +is delivered. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at chest, +_thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry right_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +82. The attack by _disengagement_ is particularly effective following +_the press_. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, press_, and at +stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +83. The _beat_ is an attack in which a sharp blow is struck against +the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an +opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when +there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, beat_, and at stomach +(chest, etc.), _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +84. In the _twist_ the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or +bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a +straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength +on the part of the attack. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, twist_, and at +stomach, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, low parry, left_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + + +FEINTS. + +85. Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are +made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the +desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according +to the number of such movements made by the attack. + +86. In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force +as possible is put into a feint. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, feint_ head _thrust_; at +stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number two, parry right and low parry right_; 3. +_ASSAULT_. + +Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes +both parries. + +87. In double feints first one part of the body and then another is +threatened and a third attacked. + +Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, feint straight thrust_ +at chest; _disengagement_ at chest; at stomach, _lunge_; 2. _Number +two, parry right, parry left_, and _low parry left_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +88. An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the +_press_ or _beat_. + +89. In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. When +the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the attack the +feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a counter +feint. + +90. A _counter feint_ is a feint following the opponent's feint or +following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined +movements. + + +COMBINED MOVEMENTS. + +91. When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various foot +movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor +combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession, +increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more +skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently. + +1. Example: Being at the _engage_, 1. _Number one, by disengagement_ +at chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, right step_ (left foot +first), and _lunge_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +2. Example: Being at _engage left_, _Number one, press_ and _lunge_; +2. _Number two, parry right, left step_, and _thrust_; 3. _ASSAULT_. + +3. Example: Being at the _engage_, _Number one, by disengagement_ at +chest, _thrust_; 2. _Number two, parry left, front pass_, and at head +_butt strike_; 3. _Number one, right step_; 4. _ASSAULT_. + +92. Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as _cross +counters_, and example No. 3 of movements known as _close counters_. + +93. A _chancery_ is an attack by means of which the opponent is +disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which +disables his weapon. + +94. When the different combinations are executed with sufficient skill +the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized and +executed at the command _assault_. The accuracy and celerity of the +movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to +the correction of faulty execution. + +95. It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to +leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of +instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the +object of the drill. + + +VII. FENCING AT WILL. + +96. As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to +the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men, +each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself. +Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random +attacks and defenses. + +97. The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a time. +Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn different +methods of attack and defense from each other. + +98. The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a +view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards +everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the +movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. + +99. Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent dodging +to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be +continually encouraged. + +100. In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents facing +each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then +immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles +engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his +opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided +before the salute. + +101. The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing salute +having been rendered, the instructor commands, _At will_, 2. +_ASSAULT_, after which either party has the right to attack. To +interrupt the contest the instructor will command _HALT_, at which the +combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the +contest the instructor will command, 1. _Halt_, 2. _SALUTE_, at which +the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove +their masks. + +102. When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one +opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at +_charge bayonet_, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver +an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor +commands, _HALT_, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in +assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double +time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a +distance not exceeding 30 yards. + +103. The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide +doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest +indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment +on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and +explain how they may be avoided in the future. + +[Illustration: Par. 104.] + +104. As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield the +rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand at +the small Of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method to +advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded. + +105. After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in +fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When +practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this +character. + +In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of +umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at +once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the +numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required +in group fencing. + + +RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +106. 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit +counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient +force to disable. + +2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit." + +3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A +position of engage is taken. + +4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only +when the first hit was not called. + +5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of +breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the +position of the order. + +6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will +not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend +himself. + +7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing. + +8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. + + +SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +107. When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's position +and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to discover, if +possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the adversary out +and induce him to expose that part of the body at which the attack is +to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a feint and then +make the real attack. + +108. Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are +difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more +exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there +is no previous warning of its delivery although it should always be +expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be +reached by thrusts or cuts. + +109. Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without +knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and +leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain +attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will +soon discover. + +110. Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging. + +111. The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many +forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible. +Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted. + + +HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS. + +112. The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of +his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead +in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and +arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as +instructors by fencing with each other. + +113. The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his +degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor +is demonstrating the combinations, feints, returns, and parries the +rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil +and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil +exposes himself too much in the feints and parries the instructor +will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be +too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious +and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to +teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill. + +114. Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and +fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of +such opportunities. + + +VIII. COMPETITIONS. + +115. In competitions between different organizations none but skillful +fencers will be allowed to participate. + +116. In contests between two men judges may assign values to hits as +follows: + +------------------------------------------------- + | Thrusts | | Butt + | and | Cuts. | of + | lunges. | | rifle. +------------------------------------------------- +Stomach | 4 | | 1 +Chest | 3 | | +Head | 3 | 2 | 3 +Neck | 2 | 2 | 2 +Legs | 1 | 1 | +Arms and hands | 1 | 1 | +------------------------------------------------- + +Stepping out of bounds, 4 points. + +117. When superiority between two men is decided by bouts, each bout +will be decided by itself, i.e., points won in one bout can not be +carried over to another. + +118. Details other than those mentioned above will be arranged by the +officials of the competition. + + + + +[C.I.D.R. 20.] + +INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS. + +CHANGES } WAR DEPARTMENT, +No. 20 } WASHINGTON, _August 18, 1917_. + +Paragraph 150 and paragraph 150 of Appendix A, Infantry Drill +Regulations (corrected to Apr. 15, 1917), are changed as follows, to +correct error made in printing that edition: + +150. (Page 47.) _CEASE FIRING._ + +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of +load; those not loaded are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked +and brought to the order. + +_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position, or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._) + +[300.73, A.G.O.] + +150. (Page 220, Appendix A.) _CEASE FIRING._ + +Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of +load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge +is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights +are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order. + +_Cease firing_ is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position or to steady the men. (_C.I.D.R. No. 20, August 18, 1917._) + +[300.73, A.G.O.] + +BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR: + +H.L. SCOTT, +_Major General, Chief of Staff_. + +Official: +H.P. McCAIN, +_The Adjutant General_. + + + + +Books necessary for citizens and for every man interested in home +defense and the military. + +Field Service Regulations .75 +Regulations for the Army of the United States 1.00 +Manual for Army Bakers .75 +Blue Jackets Manual 1.00 +Sanitary Troops .75 +Manual of Physical Training .75 +Rules of Land Warfare .75 +Coast Artillery Drill Regulations 1.00 +Provisional Drill & Service Reg. For Field Artillery 1.25 +Ship and Gun Drills .60 +Cavalry Drill Regulations .75 +Small Arms Firing Manual .75 +United States Army Transport Service Regulations .50 +Manual for Army Cooks .75 +Engineer's Field Manual 1.25 +The Deck and Boat Book .60 +Infantry Drill Regulations .50 +Drill Regulations for Machine Gun Companies .30 +Manual of Interior Guard Duty United States Army .50 +Signal Book United States Army .35 +Provisional Drill Regulations for 6' Howitzers 1.25 +Drill Regulations for Field Companies of Signal Corps .75 +Gunnery and Explosive .35 +Manual for Court Martials 1.10 +Manual for Medical Department 1.10 +Army Horse in Accident & Disease .85 +Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates Manual .50 +Provisional Drill Reg. for Horse and Light Artillery 1.25 + +All the above Military and Naval text books have been compiled by U.S. +Army and Navy officers and contain all changes to date. + +MILITARY PUBLISHING CO. +42 BROADWAY +NEW YORK + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED +STATES ARMY, 1911*** + + +******* This file should be named 20866.txt or 20866.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/0/8/6/20866 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + |